IEEEtran (18sep14)

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@35194 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

14 files changed, 3633 insertions, 841 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf
index 5c87d30976f..356be1e5141 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtrantools_doc.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtrantools_doc.txt
index f38ec4f31e8..9dd642f8eae 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtrantools_doc.txt
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtrantools_doc.txt
@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
 
-IEEEtrantools_doc.txt 2012/12/27 version 1.3
-(Version 1.3 is based on the commands of version 1.8 of IEEEtran.cls)
+IEEEtrantools_doc.txt 2014/09/17 version 1.4
+(Version 1.4 is based on the commands of version 1.8a of IEEEtran.cls)
 This document is the user guide for the IEEEtrantools.sty package.
 
 The IEEEtrantools.sty package provides several popular and unique
-commands from the IEEEtran.cls class (version 1.8) file.
+commands from the IEEEtran.cls class (version 1.8a) file.
 
 IEEEtrantools.sty should not be used with IEEEtran.cls.
 
@@ -14,9 +14,9 @@ visit the IEEEtrantools support page at my website:
 http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/tools/
 
 The latest version and documentation of IEEEtrantools can be obtained at:
-http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/
+http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/
 
-Copyright (c) 2002-2012 by Michael Shell
+Copyright (c) 2002-2014 by Michael Shell
                         See
                         http://www.michaelshell.org/
                         for current contact information.
@@ -236,9 +236,9 @@ http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/
 *** The IEEEeqnarray family ***
 
 Please note that IEEEtrantools provides and sets the length variable
-\IEEEnormaljot. As IEEEtrantools is loaded, \IEEEnormaljot will be set to
-the current value of \jot. If the user later alters the document's nominal
-\jot the value of \IEEEnormaljot should be revised as well.
+\IEEEnormaljot. At the \begin{document}, \IEEEnormaljot will be set to
+the current value of \jot. If the user later alters the document's
+nominal \jot, the value of \IEEEnormaljot should be revised as well.
 
 The support commands for the IEEEeqnarray commands (\IEEEstrut, 
 \IEEEeqnarrayvrule, \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, etc.) are also provided.
@@ -247,9 +247,9 @@ For more information on the use of the IEEEeqnarray family of commands,
 the following sources of information are recommended:
 
  1. The IEEEtran HOWTO manual (IEEEeqnarray is covered in the Appendices):
-    http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/
+    http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/
 
- 2. Stephan M. Moser's "How to Typeset Equations in LaTeX"
+ 2. Stefan M. Moser's "How to Typeset Equations in LaTeX"
     http://moser.cm.nctu.edu.tw/manuals.html#eqlatex
 
  3. Tobias Oetiker's "The Not So Short Introduction to LaTeX2e"
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/README
index 7d388162da3..561a8bedf14 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/README
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/README
@@ -1,12 +1,12 @@
 
-December 27, 2012
+September 17, 2014
 
 
 IEEEtran is a LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of Electrical and
 Electronics Engineers (IEEE) transactions journals and conferences.
 The latest version of the IEEEtran package can be found at CTAN:
 
-http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/
+http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/
 
 as well as within IEEE's site:
 
@@ -18,39 +18,21 @@ website:
 
 http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/
 
-V1.8 is a significant update over the 1.7a release. For a full list of
-changes, please read the file changelog.txt. The most notable changes
-include:
-
-
- 1) New transmag class option to support the IEEE Transactions on Magnetics
-    format. Thanks to Wei Yingkang, Sangmin Suh and Benjamin Gaussens
-    for suggestions and beta testing.
-
- 2) The \IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext and 
-    \IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext
-    commands have been deprecated in favor of their
-    \IEEEtitleabstractindextext and \IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext
-    (observe that the "not" has changed to "non") equivalents. This change
-    generalizes and decouples them from compsoc mode because the new
-    transmag mode also uses them now.
-
- 3) Added new *-forms of \IEEEyesnumber*, \IEEEnonumber*, \IEEEyessubnumber*,
-    and \IEEEnosubnumber* (the non-star form of the latter is also new) which
-    persist across IEEEeqnarray lines until countermanded. To provide for
-    continued subequations across instances of IEEEeqnarrays as well as for
-    subequations that follow a main equation (e.g., 14, 14a, 14b ...)
-    \IEEEyessubnumber no longer automatically increments the equation number
-    on it's first invocation of a subequation group. Invoke both
-    \IEEEyesnumber\IEEEyessubnumber together to start a new
-    equation/subequation group.
- 
- 4) Hyperref links now work with IEEEeqnarray equations.
-    Thanks to Stefan M. Moser for reporting this problem.
-
- 5) Revised spacing at top of top figures and tables to better
-    align with the top main text lines as IEEE does in its journals. 
-    Thanks to Dirk Beyer for reporting this issue and beta testing.
+Version 1.8a has a number of significant changes over the v1.8 release.
+For a full list of changes, please read the file changelog.txt. The most
+notable changes include:
+
+
+ 1) Extensive rework of the compsoc mode to comply with the latest standards
+    of the IEEE Computer Society.
+
+ 2) Fixed abstract, index terms and diamond line for compsoc technotes.
+
+ 3) New \IEEEraisesectionheading{} command to provide for the special
+    raised first section heading of Computer Society journal papers.
+
+ 4) Internal code improvements for page setup and command argument
+    processing.
 
 
 Best wishes for all your publication endeavors,
@@ -83,6 +65,9 @@ IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf     - The IEEEtran LaTeX class user manual.
 
 bare_conf.tex          - A bare bones starter file for conference papers.
 
+bare_conf_compsoc.tex  - A bare bones starter file for Computer Society
+                         conference papers.
+
 bare_jrnl.tex          - A bare bones starter file for journal papers.
 
 bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex  - A bare bones starter file for Computer Society
@@ -120,6 +105,6 @@ Retain all contribution notices and credits.
 ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **
 
 File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex,
-                   bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex,
-                   bare_jrnl_transmag.tex
+                   bare_conf.tex, bare_conf_compsoc.tex, bare_jrnl.tex,
+                   bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex, bare_jrnl_transmag.tex
 ***************************************************************************
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/README.tools b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/README.tools
index 78fd31cc499..c09a1d3e832 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/README.tools
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/README.tools
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-December 27, 2012
+September 17, 2014
 
 
 The IEEEtrantools.sty package provides several commands from the
@@ -42,49 +42,11 @@ http://www.michaelshell.org/
 
 
 *******
-12/2012 V1.3 (V1.8 of IEEEtran.cls) changes:
-
- 1) No longer redefines the standard LaTeX itemize, enumerate and 
-    description (IED) lists by default. (e.g., the older package option
-    "retainorgcmds" is now the default behavior.) A new package option,
-    "redeflists", can be invoked to redefine the standard IED list
-    environments to their IEEE versions. IEEEitemize, IEEEenumerate and
-    IEEEdescription remain available in any case. The redeflists option
-    may not be compatible with other packages that alter the standard
-    IED list environments.
-
- 2) Added new *-forms of \IEEEyesnumber*, \IEEEnonumber*, \IEEEyessubnumber*,
-    and \IEEEnosubnumber* (the non-star form of the latter is also new) which
-    persist across IEEEeqnarray lines until countermanded. To provide for
-    continued subequations across instances of IEEEeqnarrays as well as for
-    subequations that follow a main equation (e.g., 14, 14a, 14b ...)
-    \IEEEyessubnumber no longer automatically increments the equation number
-    on it's first invocation of a subequation group. Invoke both
-    \IEEEyesnumber\IEEEyessubnumber together to start a new
-    equation/subequation group.
-
- 3) Hyperref links now work with IEEEeqnarray equations.
-    Thanks to Stefan M. Moser for reporting this problem.
-
- 4) Now provides the IEEEproof environment, as well as the
-    \IEEEQEDhere, \IEEEQEDhereeqn and \IEEEQEDoff commands.
-    Also, \IEEEproofindentspace allows users to change the
-    IEEEproof indentation via \renewcommand.
-    Thanks to Mark D. Butala, Hennadiy Leontyev and Stefan M. Moser
-    for suggesting this. Special thanks to Stefan M. Moser for beta
-    testing and additional suggestions which improved IEEEproof.
-
- 5) Revised \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{} to allow inner alignments without
-    requiring extra containing braces to prevent an incomplete \ifx error.
-    Thanks to Stefan M. Moser and Auke van der Valk for reporting this
-    problem.
-
- 6) Added \IEEEauthorrefmark.
-
- 7) Removed support for legacy IED list commands.
-    IEEEtrantools no longer defines or references \labelindent so as to
-    avoid namespace problems with list packages that define it.
-    Thanks to Sven Köhler for reporting the problem with enumitem.sty.
+2014/09/17 V1.4 (V1.8a of IEEEtran.cls) changes:
+
+ 1) Internal code improvements for command argument processing and
+    support for future features.
+
 
 ********************************** Files **********************************
 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_adv.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_adv.tex
index 7609665fcc6..9ac16473f99 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_adv.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_adv.tex
@@ -1,14 +1,14 @@
 
 %% bare_adv.tex
-%% V1.4
-%% 2012/12/27
+%% V1.4a
+%% 2014/09/17
 %% by Michael Shell
 %% See: 
 %% http://www.michaelshell.org/
 %% for current contact information.
 %%
 %% This is a skeleton file demonstrating the advanced use of IEEEtran.cls
-%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8 or later) with an IEEE Computer
+%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8a or later) with an IEEE Computer
 %% Society journal paper.
 %%
 %% Support sites:
@@ -41,19 +41,19 @@
 %% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **
 %%
 %% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex,
-%%                    bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex,
-%%                    bare_jrnl_transmag.tex
+%%                    bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_conf_compsoc.tex,
+%%                    bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex, bare_jrnl_transmag.tex
 %%*************************************************************************
 
+
 % *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system  ***
 % *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform ***
-% *** with production work. IEEE's font choices can trigger bugs that do  ***
-% *** not appear when using other class files.                            ***
+% *** with production work. IEEE's font choices and paper sizes can       ***
+% *** trigger bugs that do not appear when using other class files.       ***                          ***
 % The testflow support page is at:
 % http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/
 
 
-
 % IEEEtran V1.7 and later provides for these CLASSINPUT macros to allow the
 % user to reprogram some IEEEtran.cls defaults if needed. These settings
 % override the internal defaults of IEEEtran.cls regardless of which class
@@ -68,19 +68,9 @@
 
 
 
-% Note that the a4paper option is mainly intended so that authors in
-% countries using A4 can easily print to A4 and see how their papers will
-% look in print - the typesetting of the document will not typically be
-% affected with changes in paper size (but the bottom and side margins will).
-% Use the testflow package mentioned above to verify correct handling of
-% both paper sizes by the user's LaTeX system.
-%
-% Also note that the "draftcls" or "draftclsnofoot", not "draft", option
-% should be used if it is desired that the figures are to be displayed in
-% draft mode.
+
 %
-\documentclass[12pt,journal,compsoc]{IEEEtran}
-% The Computer Society requires 12pt.
+\documentclass[10pt,journal,compsoc]{IEEEtran}
 % If IEEEtran.cls has not been installed into the LaTeX system files,
 % manually specify the path to it like:
 % \documentclass[10pt,journal,compsoc]{../sty/IEEEtran}
@@ -128,10 +118,10 @@
 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
   % IEEE Computer Society needs nocompress option
   % requires cite.sty v4.0 or later (November 2003)
-  % \usepackage[nocompress]{cite}
+  \usepackage[nocompress]{cite}
 \else
   % normal IEEE
-  % \usepackage{cite}
+  \usepackage{cite}
 \fi
 % cite.sty was written by Donald Arseneau
 % V1.6 and later of IEEEtran pre-defines the format of the cite.sty package
@@ -143,8 +133,7 @@
 % noadjust option (cite.sty V3.8 and later) if you want to turn this off
 % such as if a citation ever needs to be enclosed in parenthesis.
 % cite.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. Be sure and use
-% version 4.0 (2003-05-27) and later if using hyperref.sty. cite.sty does
-% not currently provide for hyperlinked citations.
+% version 5.0 (2009-03-20) and later if using hyperref.sty.
 % The latest version can be obtained at:
 % http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/cite/
 % The documentation is contained in the cite.sty file itself.
@@ -156,9 +145,6 @@
 % (e.g., [1], [2], [3], [4]). To get the latter we need to load the cite
 % package with the nocompress option which is supported by cite.sty v4.0
 % and later.
-%
-% Note also the use of a CLASSOPTION conditional provided by 
-% IEEEtran.cls V1.7 and later.
 
 
 
@@ -313,7 +299,7 @@
 
 % *** SUBFIGURE PACKAGES ***
 %\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
-%  \usepackage[caption=false,font=normalsize,labelfont=sf,textfont=sf]{subfig}
+%  \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize,labelfont=sf,textfont=sf]{subfig}
 %\else
 %  \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize]{subfig}
 %\fi
@@ -326,10 +312,10 @@
 % and invoke subfig.sty's "caption=false" package option (available since
 % subfig.sty version 1.3, 2005/06/28) as this is will preserve IEEEtran.cls
 % handling of captions.
-% Note that the Computer Society format requires a larger sans serif font
-% than the serif footnote size font used in traditional IEEE formatting
-% and thus the need to invoke different subfig.sty package options depending
-% on whether compsoc mode has been enabled.
+% Note that the Computer Society format requires a sans serif font rather
+% than the serif font used in traditional IEEE formatting and thus the need
+% to invoke different subfig.sty package options depending on whether
+% compsoc mode has been enabled.
 %
 % The latest version and documentation of subfig.sty can be obtained at:
 % http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/subfig/
@@ -543,7 +529,10 @@ pdfkeywords={Computer Society, IEEEtran, journal, LaTeX, paper,
 \begin{document}
 %
 % paper title
-% can use linebreaks \\ within to get better formatting as desired
+% Titles are generally capitalized except for words such as a, an, and, as,
+% at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to and up, which are usually
+% not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of the title.
+% Linebreaks \\ can be used within to get better formatting as desired.
 % Do not put math or special symbols in the title.
 \title{Bare Advanced Demo of IEEEtran.cls\\ for Computer Society Journals}
 %
@@ -579,7 +568,7 @@ GA, 30332.\protect\\
 % \\ is fragile and will error, could use \hfil\break instead.
 E-mail: see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html
 \IEEEcompsocthanksitem J. Doe and J. Doe are with Anonymous University.}% <-this % stops a space
-\thanks{Manuscript received April 19, 2005; revised December 27, 2012.}}
+\thanks{Manuscript received April 19, 2005; revised September 17, 2014.}}
 
 % note the % following the last \IEEEmembership and also \thanks - 
 % these prevent an unwanted space from occurring between the last author name
@@ -602,7 +591,7 @@ E-mail: see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html
 
 
 % The paper headers
-\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~11, No.~4, December~2012}%
+\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~13, No.~9, September~2014}%
 {Shell \MakeLowercase{\textit{et al.}}: Bare Advanced Demo of IEEEtran.cls for Journals}
 % The only time the second header will appear is for the odd numbered pages
 % after the title page when using the twoside option.
@@ -620,9 +609,9 @@ E-mail: see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html
 % journals, the available text space is not reduced by their presence.
 % If you want to put a publisher's ID mark on the page you can do it like
 % this:
-%\IEEEpubid{0000--0000/00\$00.00~\copyright~2012 IEEE}
+%\IEEEpubid{0000--0000/00\$00.00~\copyright~2014 IEEE}
 % or like this to get the Computer Society new two part style.
-%\IEEEpubid{\makebox[\columnwidth]{\hfill 0000--0000/00/\$00.00~\copyright~2012 IEEE}%
+%\IEEEpubid{\makebox[\columnwidth]{\hfill 0000--0000/00/\$00.00~\copyright~2014 IEEE}%
 %\hspace{\columnsep}\makebox[\columnwidth]{Published by the IEEE Computer Society\hfill}}
 % Remember, if you use this you must call \IEEEpubidadjcol in the second
 % column for its text to clear the IEEEpubid mark (Computer Society journal
@@ -678,26 +667,20 @@ Computer Society, IEEEtran, journal, \LaTeX, paper, template.
 \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle
 
 
-
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+\IEEEraisesectionheading{\section{Introduction}\label{sec:introduction}}
+\else
 \section{Introduction}
-% Computer Society journal papers do something a tad strange with the very
-% first section heading (almost always called "Introduction"). They place it
-% ABOVE the main text! IEEEtran.cls currently does not do this for you.
-% However, You can achieve this effect by making LaTeX jump through some
-% hoops via something like:
-%
-%\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
-%  \noindent\raisebox{2\baselineskip}[0pt][0pt]%
-%  {\parbox{\columnwidth}{\section{Introduction}\label{sec:introduction}%
-%  \global\everypar=\everypar}}%
-%  \vspace{-1\baselineskip}\vspace{-\parskip}\par
-%\else
-%  \section{Introduction}\label{sec:introduction}\par
-%\fi
-%
-% Admittedly, this is a hack and may well be fragile, but seems to do the
-% trick for me. Note the need to keep any \label that may be used right
-% after \section in the above as the hack puts \section within a raised box.
+\label{sec:introduction}
+\fi
+% Computer Society journal (but not conference!) papers do something unusual
+% with the very first section heading (almost always called "Introduction").
+% They place it ABOVE the main text! IEEEtran.cls does not automatically do
+% this for you, but you can achieve this effect with the provided
+% \IEEEraisesectionheading{} command. Note the need to keep any \label that
+% is to refer to the section immediately after \section in the above as
+% \IEEEraisesectionheading puts \section within a raised box.
+
 
 
 
@@ -718,14 +701,14 @@ Computer Society, IEEEtran, journal, \LaTeX, paper, template.
 % and "HIS" in caps to complete the first word.
 \IEEEPARstart{T}{his} demo file is intended to serve as a ``starter file''
 for IEEE Computer Society journal papers produced under \LaTeX\ using
-IEEEtran.cls version 1.8 and later.
+IEEEtran.cls version 1.8a and later.
 % You must have at least 2 lines in the paragraph with the drop letter
 % (should never be an issue)
 I wish you the best of success.
 
 \hfill mds
  
-\hfill December 27, 2012
+\hfill September 17, 2014
 
 \subsection{Subsection Heading Here}
 Subsection text here.
@@ -756,7 +739,7 @@ Subsubsection text here.
 % where an .eps filename suffix will be assumed under latex, 
 % and a .pdf suffix will be assumed for pdflatex; or what has been declared
 % via \DeclareGraphicsExtensions.
-%\caption{Simulation Results.}
+%\caption{Simulation results for the network.}
 %\label{fig_sim}
 %\end{figure}
 
@@ -780,18 +763,26 @@ Subsubsection text here.
 %\hfil
 %\subfloat[Case II]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}%
 %\label{fig_second_case}}
-%\caption{Simulation results.}
+%\caption{Simulation results for the network.}
 %\label{fig_sim}
 %\end{figure*}
 %
 % Note that often IEEE papers with subfigures do not employ subfigure
 % captions (using the optional argument to \subfloat[]), but instead will
 % reference/describe all of them (a), (b), etc., within the main caption.
-
-
-% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the 
-% \caption command should come BEFORE the table. Table text will default to
-% \footnotesize as IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables.
+% Be aware that for subfig.sty to generate the (a), (b), etc., subfigure
+% labels, the optional argument to \subfloat must be present. If a
+% subcaption is not desired, just leave its contents blank,
+% e.g., \subfloat[].
+
+
+% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the
+% \caption command should come BEFORE the table and, given that table
+% captions serve much like titles, are usually capitalized except for words
+% such as a, an, and, as, at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to
+% and up, which are usually not capitalized unless they are the first or
+% last word of the caption. Table text will default to \footnotesize as
+% IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables.
 % The \label must come after \caption as always.
 %
 %\begin{table}[!t]
@@ -814,15 +805,16 @@ Subsubsection text here.
 %\end{table}
 
 
-% Note that IEEE does not put floats in the very first column - or typically
-% anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, in-text middle ("here")
-% positioning is not used. Most IEEE journals use top floats exclusively.
-% However, Computer Society journals sometimes do use bottom floats - bear
-% this in mind when choosing appropriate optional arguments for the
-% figure/table environments.
-% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals, places footnotes above bottom
-% floats. This can be corrected via the \fnbelowfloat command of the
-% stfloats package.
+% Note that the IEEE does not put floats in the very first column
+% - or typically anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also,
+% in-text middle ("here") positioning is typically not used, but it
+% is allowed and encouraged for Computer Society conferences (but
+% not Computer Society journals). Most IEEE journals/conferences use
+% top floats exclusively. 
+% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places
+% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the
+% \fnbelowfloat command of the stfloats package.
+
 
 
 
@@ -858,7 +850,7 @@ Appendix one text goes here.
 Appendix two text goes here.
 
 
-% use section* for acknowledgement
+% use section* for acknowledgment
 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
   % The Computer Society usually uses the plural form
   \section*{Acknowledgments}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_conf.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_conf.tex
index d87c598d2ad..b37a6a3f114 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_conf.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_conf.tex
@@ -1,14 +1,15 @@
 
 %% bare_conf.tex
-%% V1.4
-%% 2012/12/27
+%% V1.4a
+%% 2014/09/17
 %% by Michael Shell
 %% See:
 %% http://www.michaelshell.org/
 %% for current contact information.
 %%
 %% This is a skeleton file demonstrating the use of IEEEtran.cls
-%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8 or later) with an IEEE conference paper.
+%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8a or later) with an IEEE
+%% conference paper.
 %%
 %% Support sites:
 %% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/
@@ -40,32 +41,23 @@
 %% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **
 %%
 %% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex,
-%%                    bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex,
-%%                    bare_jrnl_transmag.tex
+%%                    bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_conf_compsoc.tex,
+%%                    bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex, bare_jrnl_transmag.tex
 %%*************************************************************************
 
+
 % *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system  ***
 % *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform ***
-% *** with production work. IEEE's font choices can trigger bugs that do  ***
-% *** not appear when using other class files.                            ***
+% *** with production work. IEEE's font choices and paper sizes can       ***
+% *** trigger bugs that do not appear when using other class files.       ***                          ***
 % The testflow support page is at:
 % http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/
 
 
 
-% Note that the a4paper option is mainly intended so that authors in
-% countries using A4 can easily print to A4 and see how their papers will
-% look in print - the typesetting of the document will not typically be
-% affected with changes in paper size (but the bottom and side margins will).
-% Use the testflow package mentioned above to verify correct handling of
-% both paper sizes by the user's LaTeX system.
-%
-% Also note that the "draftcls" or "draftclsnofoot", not "draft", option
-% should be used if it is desired that the figures are to be displayed in
-% draft mode.
-%
 \documentclass[conference]{IEEEtran}
-% Add the compsoc option for Computer Society conferences.
+% Some Computer Society conferences also require the compsoc mode option,
+% but others use the standard conference format.
 %
 % If IEEEtran.cls has not been installed into the LaTeX system files,
 % manually specify the path to it like:
@@ -115,8 +107,7 @@
 % noadjust option (cite.sty V3.8 and later) if you want to turn this off
 % such as if a citation ever needs to be enclosed in parenthesis.
 % cite.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. Be sure and use
-% version 4.0 (2003-05-27) and later if using hyperref.sty. cite.sty does
-% not currently provide for hyperlinked citations.
+% version 5.0 (2009-03-20) and later if using hyperref.sty.
 % The latest version can be obtained at:
 % http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/cite/
 % The documentation is contained in the cite.sty file itself.
@@ -330,7 +321,10 @@
 \begin{document}
 %
 % paper title
-% can use linebreaks \\ within to get better formatting as desired
+% Titles are generally capitalized except for words such as a, an, and, as,
+% at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to and up, which are usually
+% not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of the title.
+% Linebreaks \\ can be used within to get better formatting as desired.
 % Do not put math or special symbols in the title.
 \title{Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for Conferences}
 
@@ -351,7 +345,7 @@ Email: homer@thesimpsons.com}
 \and
 \IEEEauthorblockN{James Kirk\\ and Montgomery Scott}
 \IEEEauthorblockA{Starfleet Academy\\
-San Francisco, California 96678-2391\\
+San Francisco, California 96678--2391\\
 Telephone: (800) 555--1212\\
 Fax: (888) 555--1212}}
 
@@ -416,14 +410,14 @@ The abstract goes here.
 % no \IEEEPARstart
 This demo file is intended to serve as a ``starter file''
 for IEEE conference papers produced under \LaTeX\ using
-IEEEtran.cls version 1.8 and later.
+IEEEtran.cls version 1.8a and later.
 % You must have at least 2 lines in the paragraph with the drop letter
 % (should never be an issue)
 I wish you the best of success.
 
 \hfill mds
  
-\hfill December 27, 2012
+\hfill September 17, 2014
 
 \subsection{Subsection Heading Here}
 Subsection text here.
@@ -452,7 +446,7 @@ Subsubsection text here.
 % where an .eps filename suffix will be assumed under latex, 
 % and a .pdf suffix will be assumed for pdflatex; or what has been declared
 % via \DeclareGraphicsExtensions.
-%\caption{Simulation Results.}
+%\caption{Simulation results for the network.}
 %\label{fig_sim}
 %\end{figure}
 
@@ -475,18 +469,26 @@ Subsubsection text here.
 %\hfil
 %\subfloat[Case II]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}%
 %\label{fig_second_case}}
-%\caption{Simulation results.}
+%\caption{Simulation results for the network.}
 %\label{fig_sim}
 %\end{figure*}
 %
 % Note that often IEEE papers with subfigures do not employ subfigure
 % captions (using the optional argument to \subfloat[]), but instead will
 % reference/describe all of them (a), (b), etc., within the main caption.
-
-
-% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the 
-% \caption command should come BEFORE the table. Table text will default to
-% \footnotesize as IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables.
+% Be aware that for subfig.sty to generate the (a), (b), etc., subfigure
+% labels, the optional argument to \subfloat must be present. If a
+% subcaption is not desired, just leave its contents blank,
+% e.g., \subfloat[].
+
+
+% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the
+% \caption command should come BEFORE the table and, given that table
+% captions serve much like titles, are usually capitalized except for words
+% such as a, an, and, as, at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to
+% and up, which are usually not capitalized unless they are the first or
+% last word of the caption. Table text will default to \footnotesize as
+% IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables.
 % The \label must come after \caption as always.
 %
 %\begin{table}[!t]
@@ -509,12 +511,16 @@ Subsubsection text here.
 %\end{table}
 
 
-% Note that IEEE does not put floats in the very first column - or typically
-% anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, in-text middle ("here")
-% positioning is not used. Most IEEE journals/conferences use top floats
-% exclusively. Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places
-% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the \fnbelowfloat
-% command of the stfloats package.
+% Note that the IEEE does not put floats in the very first column
+% - or typically anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also,
+% in-text middle ("here") positioning is typically not used, but it
+% is allowed and encouraged for Computer Society conferences (but
+% not Computer Society journals). Most IEEE journals/conferences use
+% top floats exclusively. 
+% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places
+% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the
+% \fnbelowfloat command of the stfloats package.
+
 
 
 
@@ -527,7 +533,7 @@ The conclusion goes here.
 % conference papers do not normally have an appendix
 
 
-% use section* for acknowledgement
+% use section* for acknowledgment
 \section*{Acknowledgment}
 
 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_conf_compsoc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_conf_compsoc.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b26a88e795e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_conf_compsoc.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,605 @@
+
+%% bare_conf_compsoc.tex
+%% V1.4a
+%% 2014/09/17
+%% by Michael Shell
+%% See:
+%% http://www.michaelshell.org/
+%% for current contact information.
+%%
+%% This is a skeleton file demonstrating the use of IEEEtran.cls
+%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8s or later) with an IEEE Computer
+%% Society conference paper.
+%%
+%% Support sites:
+%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/
+%% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/
+%% and
+%% http://www.ieee.org/
+
+%%*************************************************************************
+%% Legal Notice:
+%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or
+%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
+%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! 
+%% User assumes all risk.
+%% In no event shall IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for
+%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental,
+%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse
+%% of any information contained here.
+%%
+%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not
+%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE.
+%%
+%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL)
+%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used,
+%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included
+%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released
+%% 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% Retain all contribution notices and credits.
+%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including  **
+%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **
+%%
+%% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex,
+%%                    bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_conf_compsoc.tex,
+%%                    bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex, bare_jrnl_transmag.tex
+%%*************************************************************************
+
+
+% *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system  ***
+% *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform ***
+% *** with production work. IEEE's font choices and paper sizes can       ***
+% *** trigger bugs that do not appear when using other class files.       ***                          ***
+% The testflow support page is at:
+% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/
+
+
+
+\documentclass[conference,compsoc]{IEEEtran}
+% Some/most Computer Society conferences require the compsoc mode option,
+% but others may want the standard conference format.
+%
+% If IEEEtran.cls has not been installed into the LaTeX system files,
+% manually specify the path to it like:
+% \documentclass[conference,compsoc]{../sty/IEEEtran}
+
+
+
+
+
+% Some very useful LaTeX packages include:
+% (uncomment the ones you want to load)
+
+
+% *** MISC UTILITY PACKAGES ***
+%
+%\usepackage{ifpdf}
+% Heiko Oberdiek's ifpdf.sty is very useful if you need conditional
+% compilation based on whether the output is pdf or dvi.
+% usage:
+% \ifpdf
+%   % pdf code
+% \else
+%   % dvi code
+% \fi
+% The latest version of ifpdf.sty can be obtained from:
+% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/oberdiek/
+% Also, note that IEEEtran.cls V1.7 and later provides a builtin
+% \ifCLASSINFOpdf conditional that works the same way.
+% When switching from latex to pdflatex and vice-versa, the compiler may
+% have to be run twice to clear warning/error messages.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+% *** CITATION PACKAGES ***
+%
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+  % IEEE Computer Society needs nocompress option
+  % requires cite.sty v4.0 or later (November 2003)
+  \usepackage[nocompress]{cite}
+\else
+  % normal IEEE
+  \usepackage{cite}
+\fi
+% cite.sty was written by Donald Arseneau
+% V1.6 and later of IEEEtran pre-defines the format of the cite.sty package
+% \cite{} output to follow that of IEEE. Loading the cite package will
+% result in citation numbers being automatically sorted and properly
+% "compressed/ranged". e.g., [1], [9], [2], [7], [5], [6] without using
+% cite.sty will become [1], [2], [5]--[7], [9] using cite.sty. cite.sty's
+% \cite will automatically add leading space, if needed. Use cite.sty's
+% noadjust option (cite.sty V3.8 and later) if you want to turn this off
+% such as if a citation ever needs to be enclosed in parenthesis.
+% cite.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. Be sure and use
+% version 5.0 (2009-03-20) and later if using hyperref.sty.
+% The latest version can be obtained at:
+% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/cite/
+% The documentation is contained in the cite.sty file itself.
+%
+% Note that some packages require special options to format as the Computer
+% Society requires. In particular, Computer Society  papers do not use
+% compressed citation ranges as is done in typical IEEE papers
+% (e.g., [1]-[4]). Instead, they list every citation separately in order
+% (e.g., [1], [2], [3], [4]). To get the latter we need to load the cite
+% package with the nocompress option which is supported by cite.sty v4.0
+% and later.
+
+
+
+
+
+% *** GRAPHICS RELATED PACKAGES ***
+%
+\ifCLASSINFOpdf
+  % \usepackage[pdftex]{graphicx}
+  % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are
+  % \graphicspath{{../pdf/}{../jpeg/}}
+  % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with
+  % every instance of \includegraphics
+  % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.jpeg,.png}
+\else
+  % or other class option (dvipsone, dvipdf, if not using dvips). graphicx
+  % will default to the driver specified in the system graphics.cfg if no
+  % driver is specified.
+  % \usepackage[dvips]{graphicx}
+  % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are
+  % \graphicspath{{../eps/}}
+  % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with
+  % every instance of \includegraphics
+  % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.eps}
+\fi
+% graphicx was written by David Carlisle and Sebastian Rahtz. It is
+% required if you want graphics, photos, etc. graphicx.sty is already
+% installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest version and documentation
+% can be obtained at: 
+% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/
+% Another good source of documentation is "Using Imported Graphics in
+% LaTeX2e" by Keith Reckdahl which can be found at:
+% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/epslatex/
+%
+% latex, and pdflatex in dvi mode, support graphics in encapsulated
+% postscript (.eps) format. pdflatex in pdf mode supports graphics
+% in .pdf, .jpeg, .png and .mps (metapost) formats. Users should ensure
+% that all non-photo figures use a vector format (.eps, .pdf, .mps) and
+% not a bitmapped formats (.jpeg, .png). IEEE frowns on bitmapped formats
+% which can result in "jaggedy"/blurry rendering of lines and letters as
+% well as large increases in file sizes.
+%
+% You can find documentation about the pdfTeX application at:
+% http://www.tug.org/applications/pdftex
+
+
+
+
+
+% *** MATH PACKAGES ***
+%
+%\usepackage[cmex10]{amsmath}
+% A popular package from the American Mathematical Society that provides
+% many useful and powerful commands for dealing with mathematics. If using
+% it, be sure to load this package with the cmex10 option to ensure that
+% only type 1 fonts will utilized at all point sizes. Without this option,
+% it is possible that some math symbols, particularly those within
+% footnotes, will be rendered in bitmap form which will result in a
+% document that can not be IEEE Xplore compliant!
+%
+% Also, note that the amsmath package sets \interdisplaylinepenalty to 10000
+% thus preventing page breaks from occurring within multiline equations. Use:
+%\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500
+% after loading amsmath to restore such page breaks as IEEEtran.cls normally
+% does. amsmath.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest
+% version and documentation can be obtained at:
+% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/amslatex/math/
+
+
+
+
+
+% *** SPECIALIZED LIST PACKAGES ***
+%
+%\usepackage{algorithmic}
+% algorithmic.sty was written by Peter Williams and Rogerio Brito.
+% This package provides an algorithmic environment fo describing algorithms.
+% You can use the algorithmic environment in-text or within a figure
+% environment to provide for a floating algorithm. Do NOT use the algorithm
+% floating environment provided by algorithm.sty (by the same authors) or
+% algorithm2e.sty (by Christophe Fiorio) as IEEE does not use dedicated
+% algorithm float types and packages that provide these will not provide
+% correct IEEE style captions. The latest version and documentation of
+% algorithmic.sty can be obtained at:
+% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/algorithms/
+% There is also a support site at:
+% http://algorithms.berlios.de/index.html
+% Also of interest may be the (relatively newer and more customizable)
+% algorithmicx.sty package by Szasz Janos:
+% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/algorithmicx/
+
+
+
+
+% *** ALIGNMENT PACKAGES ***
+%
+%\usepackage{array}
+% Frank Mittelbach's and David Carlisle's array.sty patches and improves
+% the standard LaTeX2e array and tabular environments to provide better
+% appearance and additional user controls. As the default LaTeX2e table
+% generation code is lacking to the point of almost being broken with
+% respect to the quality of the end results, all users are strongly
+% advised to use an enhanced (at the very least that provided by array.sty)
+% set of table tools. array.sty is already installed on most systems. The
+% latest version and documentation can be obtained at:
+% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/tools/
+
+
+% IEEEtran contains the IEEEeqnarray family of commands that can be used to
+% generate multiline equations as well as matrices, tables, etc., of high
+% quality.
+
+
+
+
+% *** SUBFIGURE PACKAGES ***
+%\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+%  \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize,labelfont=sf,textfont=sf]{subfig}
+%\else
+%  \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize]{subfig}
+%\fi
+% subfig.sty, written by Steven Douglas Cochran, is the modern replacement
+% for subfigure.sty, the latter of which is no longer maintained and is
+% incompatible with some LaTeX packages including fixltx2e. However,
+% subfig.sty requires and automatically loads Axel Sommerfeldt's caption.sty
+% which will override IEEEtran.cls' handling of captions and this will result
+% in non-IEEE style figure/table captions. To prevent this problem, be sure
+% and invoke subfig.sty's "caption=false" package option (available since
+% subfig.sty version 1.3, 2005/06/28) as this is will preserve IEEEtran.cls
+% handling of captions.
+% Note that the Computer Society format requires a sans serif font rather
+% than the serif font used in traditional IEEE formatting and thus the need
+% to invoke different subfig.sty package options depending on whether
+% compsoc mode has been enabled.
+%
+% The latest version and documentation of subfig.sty can be obtained at:
+% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/subfig/
+
+
+
+
+% *** FLOAT PACKAGES ***
+%
+%\usepackage{fixltx2e}
+% fixltx2e, the successor to the earlier fix2col.sty, was written by
+% Frank Mittelbach and David Carlisle. This package corrects a few problems
+% in the LaTeX2e kernel, the most notable of which is that in current
+% LaTeX2e releases, the ordering of single and double column floats is not
+% guaranteed to be preserved. Thus, an unpatched LaTeX2e can allow a
+% single column figure to be placed prior to an earlier double column
+% figure. The latest version and documentation can be found at:
+% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/base/
+
+
+%\usepackage{stfloats}
+% stfloats.sty was written by Sigitas Tolusis. This package gives LaTeX2e
+% the ability to do double column floats at the bottom of the page as well
+% as the top. (e.g., "\begin{figure*}[!b]" is not normally possible in
+% LaTeX2e). It also provides a command:
+%\fnbelowfloat
+% to enable the placement of footnotes below bottom floats (the standard
+% LaTeX2e kernel puts them above bottom floats). This is an invasive package
+% which rewrites many portions of the LaTeX2e float routines. It may not work
+% with other packages that modify the LaTeX2e float routines. The latest
+% version and documentation can be obtained at:
+% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/sttools/
+% Do not use the stfloats baselinefloat ability as IEEE does not allow
+% \baselineskip to stretch. Authors submitting work to the IEEE should note
+% that IEEE rarely uses double column equations and that authors should try
+% to avoid such use. Do not be tempted to use the cuted.sty or midfloat.sty
+% packages (also by Sigitas Tolusis) as IEEE does not format its papers in
+% such ways.
+% Do not attempt to use stfloats with fixltx2e as they are incompatible.
+% Instead, use Morten Hogholm'a dblfloatfix which combines the features
+% of both fixltx2e and stfloats:
+%
+% \usepackage{dblfloatfix}
+% The latest version can be found at:
+% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/dblfloatfix/
+
+
+
+
+% *** PDF, URL AND HYPERLINK PACKAGES ***
+%
+%\usepackage{url}
+% url.sty was written by Donald Arseneau. It provides better support for
+% handling and breaking URLs. url.sty is already installed on most LaTeX
+% systems. The latest version and documentation can be obtained at:
+% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/url/
+% Basically, \url{my_url_here}.
+
+
+
+
+% *** Do not adjust lengths that control margins, column widths, etc. ***
+% *** Do not use packages that alter fonts (such as pslatex).         ***
+% There should be no need to do such things with IEEEtran.cls V1.6 and later.
+% (Unless specifically asked to do so by the journal or conference you plan
+% to submit to, of course. )
+
+
+% correct bad hyphenation here
+\hyphenation{op-tical net-works semi-conduc-tor}
+
+
+\begin{document}
+%
+% paper title
+% Titles are generally capitalized except for words such as a, an, and, as,
+% at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to and up, which are usually
+% not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of the title.
+% Linebreaks \\ can be used within to get better formatting as desired.
+% Do not put math or special symbols in the title.
+\title{Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for Computer Society Conferences}
+
+
+% author names and affiliations
+% use a multiple column layout for up to three different
+% affiliations
+\author{\IEEEauthorblockN{Michael Shell}
+\IEEEauthorblockA{School of Electrical and\\Computer Engineering\\
+Georgia Institute of Technology\\
+Atlanta, Georgia 30332--0250\\
+Email: http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html}
+\and
+\IEEEauthorblockN{Homer Simpson}
+\IEEEauthorblockA{Twentieth Century Fox\\
+Springfield, USA\\
+Email: homer@thesimpsons.com}
+\and
+\IEEEauthorblockN{James Kirk\\ and Montgomery Scott}
+\IEEEauthorblockA{Starfleet Academy\\
+San Francisco, California 96678-2391\\
+Telephone: (800) 555--1212\\
+Fax: (888) 555--1212}}
+
+% conference papers do not typically use \thanks and this command
+% is locked out in conference mode. If really needed, such as for
+% the acknowledgment of grants, issue a \IEEEoverridecommandlockouts
+% after \documentclass
+
+% for over three affiliations, or if they all won't fit within the width
+% of the page (and note that there is less available width in this regard for
+% compsoc conferences compared to traditional conferences), use this
+% alternative format:
+% 
+%\author{\IEEEauthorblockN{Michael Shell\IEEEauthorrefmark{1},
+%Homer Simpson\IEEEauthorrefmark{2},
+%James Kirk\IEEEauthorrefmark{3}, 
+%Montgomery Scott\IEEEauthorrefmark{3} and
+%Eldon Tyrell\IEEEauthorrefmark{4}}
+%\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{1}School of Electrical and Computer Engineering\\
+%Georgia Institute of Technology,
+%Atlanta, Georgia 30332--0250\\ Email: see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html}
+%\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{2}Twentieth Century Fox, Springfield, USA\\
+%Email: homer@thesimpsons.com}
+%\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{3}Starfleet Academy, San Francisco, California 96678-2391\\
+%Telephone: (800) 555--1212, Fax: (888) 555--1212}
+%\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{4}Tyrell Inc., 123 Replicant Street, Los Angeles, California 90210--4321}}
+
+
+
+
+% use for special paper notices
+%\IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)}
+
+
+
+
+% make the title area
+\maketitle
+
+% As a general rule, do not put math, special symbols or citations
+% in the abstract
+\begin{abstract}
+The abstract goes here.
+\end{abstract}
+
+% no keywords
+
+
+
+
+% For peer review papers, you can put extra information on the cover
+% page as needed:
+% \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
+% \begin{center} \bfseries EDICS Category: 3-BBND \end{center}
+% \fi
+%
+% For peerreview papers, this IEEEtran command inserts a page break and
+% creates the second title. It will be ignored for other modes.
+\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle
+
+
+
+\section{Introduction}
+% no \IEEEPARstart
+This demo file is intended to serve as a ``starter file''
+for IEEE conference papers produced under \LaTeX\ using
+IEEEtran.cls version 1.8a and later.
+% You must have at least 2 lines in the paragraph with the drop letter
+% (should never be an issue)
+I wish you the best of success.
+
+\hfill mds
+ 
+\hfill September 17, 2014
+
+\subsection{Subsection Heading Here}
+Subsection text here.
+
+
+\subsubsection{Subsubsection Heading Here}
+Subsubsection text here.
+
+
+% An example of a floating figure using the graphicx package.
+% Note that \label must occur AFTER (or within) \caption.
+% For figures, \caption should occur after the \includegraphics.
+% Note that IEEEtran v1.7 and later has special internal code that
+% is designed to preserve the operation of \label within \caption
+% even when the captionsoff option is in effect. However, because
+% of issues like this, it may be the safest practice to put all your
+% \label just after \caption rather than within \caption{}.
+%
+% Reminder: the "draftcls" or "draftclsnofoot", not "draft", class
+% option should be used if it is desired that the figures are to be
+% displayed while in draft mode.
+%
+%\begin{figure}[!t]
+%\centering
+%\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{myfigure}
+% where an .eps filename suffix will be assumed under latex, 
+% and a .pdf suffix will be assumed for pdflatex; or what has been declared
+% via \DeclareGraphicsExtensions.
+%\caption{Simulation results for the network.}
+%\label{fig_sim}
+%\end{figure}
+
+% Note that IEEE typically puts floats only at the top, even when this
+% results in a large percentage of a column being occupied by floats.
+
+
+% An example of a double column floating figure using two subfigures.
+% (The subfig.sty package must be loaded for this to work.)
+% The subfigure \label commands are set within each subfloat command,
+% and the \label for the overall figure must come after \caption.
+% \hfil is used as a separator to get equal spacing.
+% Watch out that the combined width of all the subfigures on a 
+% line do not exceed the text width or a line break will occur.
+%
+%\begin{figure*}[!t]
+%\centering
+%\subfloat[Case I]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}%
+%\label{fig_first_case}}
+%\hfil
+%\subfloat[Case II]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}%
+%\label{fig_second_case}}
+%\caption{Simulation results for the network.}
+%\label{fig_sim}
+%\end{figure*}
+%
+% Note that often IEEE papers with subfigures do not employ subfigure
+% captions (using the optional argument to \subfloat[]), but instead will
+% reference/describe all of them (a), (b), etc., within the main caption.
+% Be aware that for subfig.sty to generate the (a), (b), etc., subfigure
+% labels, the optional argument to \subfloat must be present. If a
+% subcaption is not desired, just leave its contents blank,
+% e.g., \subfloat[].
+
+
+% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the
+% \caption command should come BEFORE the table and, given that table
+% captions serve much like titles, are usually capitalized except for words
+% such as a, an, and, as, at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to
+% and up, which are usually not capitalized unless they are the first or
+% last word of the caption. Table text will default to \footnotesize as
+% IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables.
+% The \label must come after \caption as always.
+%
+%\begin{table}[!t]
+%% increase table row spacing, adjust to taste
+%\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.3}
+% if using array.sty, it might be a good idea to tweak the value of
+% \extrarowheight as needed to properly center the text within the cells
+%\caption{An Example of a Table}
+%\label{table_example}
+%\centering
+%% Some packages, such as MDW tools, offer better commands for making tables
+%% than the plain LaTeX2e tabular which is used here.
+%\begin{tabular}{|c||c|}
+%\hline
+%One & Two\\
+%\hline
+%Three & Four\\
+%\hline
+%\end{tabular}
+%\end{table}
+
+
+% Note that the IEEE does not put floats in the very first column
+% - or typically anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also,
+% in-text middle ("here") positioning is typically not used, but it
+% is allowed and encouraged for Computer Society conferences (but
+% not Computer Society journals). Most IEEE journals/conferences use
+% top floats exclusively. 
+% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places
+% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the
+% \fnbelowfloat command of the stfloats package.
+
+
+
+
+\section{Conclusion}
+The conclusion goes here.
+
+
+
+
+% conference papers do not normally have an appendix
+
+
+
+% use section* for acknowledgment
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+  % The Computer Society usually uses the plural form
+  \section*{Acknowledgments}
+\else
+  % regular IEEE prefers the singular form
+  \section*{Acknowledgment}
+\fi
+
+
+The authors would like to thank...
+
+
+
+
+
+% trigger a \newpage just before the given reference
+% number - used to balance the columns on the last page
+% adjust value as needed - may need to be readjusted if
+% the document is modified later
+%\IEEEtriggeratref{8}
+% The "triggered" command can be changed if desired:
+%\IEEEtriggercmd{\enlargethispage{-5in}}
+
+% references section
+
+% can use a bibliography generated by BibTeX as a .bbl file
+% BibTeX documentation can be easily obtained at:
+% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/
+% The IEEEtran BibTeX style support page is at:
+% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/bibtex/
+%\bibliographystyle{IEEEtran}
+% argument is your BibTeX string definitions and bibliography database(s)
+%\bibliography{IEEEabrv,../bib/paper}
+%
+% <OR> manually copy in the resultant .bbl file
+% set second argument of \begin to the number of references
+% (used to reserve space for the reference number labels box)
+\begin{thebibliography}{1}
+
+\bibitem{IEEEhowto:kopka}
+H.~Kopka and P.~W. Daly, \emph{A Guide to \LaTeX}, 3rd~ed.\hskip 1em plus
+  0.5em minus 0.4em\relax Harlow, England: Addison-Wesley, 1999.
+
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+
+
+
+% that's all folks
+\end{document}
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl.tex
index a3cea413552..e7b2a990d56 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl.tex
@@ -1,13 +1,14 @@
 
 %% bare_jrnl.tex
-%% V1.4
-%% 2012/12/27
+%% V1.4a
+%% 2014/09/17
 %% by Michael Shell
 %% see http://www.michaelshell.org/
 %% for current contact information.
 %%
 %% This is a skeleton file demonstrating the use of IEEEtran.cls
-%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8 or later) with an IEEE journal paper.
+%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8a or later) with an IEEE
+%% journal paper.
 %%
 %% Support sites:
 %% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/
@@ -15,16 +16,6 @@
 %% and
 %% http://www.ieee.org/
 
-
-
-% *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system  ***
-% *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform ***
-% *** with production work. IEEE's font choices can trigger bugs that do  ***
-% *** not appear when using other class files.                            ***
-% The testflow support page is at:
-% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/
-
-
 %%*************************************************************************
 %% Legal Notice:
 %% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or
@@ -49,21 +40,20 @@
 %% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **
 %%
 %% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex,
-%%                    bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex,
-%%                    bare_jrnl_transmag.tex
+%%                    bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_conf_compsoc.tex,
+%%                    bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex, bare_jrnl_transmag.tex
 %%*************************************************************************
 
-% Note that the a4paper option is mainly intended so that authors in
-% countries using A4 can easily print to A4 and see how their papers will
-% look in print - the typesetting of the document will not typically be
-% affected with changes in paper size (but the bottom and side margins will).
-% Use the testflow package mentioned above to verify correct handling of
-% both paper sizes by the user's LaTeX system.
-%
-% Also note that the "draftcls" or "draftclsnofoot", not "draft", option
-% should be used if it is desired that the figures are to be displayed in
-% draft mode.
-%
+
+% *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system  ***
+% *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform ***
+% *** with production work. IEEE's font choices and paper sizes can       ***
+% *** trigger bugs that do not appear when using other class files.       ***                          ***
+% The testflow support page is at:
+% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/
+
+
+
 \documentclass[journal]{IEEEtran}
 %
 % If IEEEtran.cls has not been installed into the LaTeX system files,
@@ -114,8 +104,7 @@
 % noadjust option (cite.sty V3.8 and later) if you want to turn this off
 % such as if a citation ever needs to be enclosed in parenthesis.
 % cite.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. Be sure and use
-% version 4.0 (2003-05-27) and later if using hyperref.sty. cite.sty does
-% not currently provide for hyperlinked citations.
+% version 5.0 (2009-03-20) and later if using hyperref.sty.
 % The latest version can be obtained at:
 % http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/cite/
 % The documentation is contained in the cite.sty file itself.
@@ -370,7 +359,10 @@
 \begin{document}
 %
 % paper title
-% can use linebreaks \\ within to get better formatting as desired
+% Titles are generally capitalized except for words such as a, an, and, as,
+% at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to and up, which are usually
+% not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of the title.
+% Linebreaks \\ can be used within to get better formatting as desired.
 % Do not put math or special symbols in the title.
 \title{Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for Journals}
 %
@@ -391,7 +383,7 @@
 of Electrical and Computer Engineering, Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta,
 GA, 30332 USA e-mail: (see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html).}% <-this % stops a space
 \thanks{J. Doe and J. Doe are with Anonymous University.}% <-this % stops a space
-\thanks{Manuscript received April 19, 2005; revised December 27, 2012.}}
+\thanks{Manuscript received April 19, 2005; revised September 17, 2014.}}
 
 % note the % following the last \IEEEmembership and also \thanks - 
 % these prevent an unwanted space from occurring between the last author name
@@ -414,7 +406,7 @@ GA, 30332 USA e-mail: (see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html).}% <-this %
 
 
 % The paper headers
-\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~11, No.~4, December~2012}%
+\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~13, No.~9, September~2014}%
 {Shell \MakeLowercase{\textit{et al.}}: Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for Journals}
 % The only time the second header will appear is for the odd numbered pages
 % after the title page when using the twoside option.
@@ -429,7 +421,7 @@ GA, 30332 USA e-mail: (see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html).}% <-this %
 
 % If you want to put a publisher's ID mark on the page you can do it like
 % this:
-%\IEEEpubid{0000--0000/00\$00.00~\copyright~2012 IEEE}
+%\IEEEpubid{0000--0000/00\$00.00~\copyright~2014 IEEE}
 % Remember, if you use this you must call \IEEEpubidadjcol in the second
 % column for its text to clear the IEEEpubid mark.
 
@@ -490,14 +482,14 @@ IEEEtran, journal, \LaTeX, paper, template.
 % and "HIS" in caps to complete the first word.
 \IEEEPARstart{T}{his} demo file is intended to serve as a ``starter file''
 for IEEE journal papers produced under \LaTeX\ using
-IEEEtran.cls version 1.8 and later.
+IEEEtran.cls version 1.8a and later.
 % You must have at least 2 lines in the paragraph with the drop letter
 % (should never be an issue)
 I wish you the best of success.
 
 \hfill mds
  
-\hfill December 27, 2012
+\hfill September 17, 2014
 
 \subsection{Subsection Heading Here}
 Subsection text here.
@@ -528,7 +520,7 @@ Subsubsection text here.
 % where an .eps filename suffix will be assumed under latex, 
 % and a .pdf suffix will be assumed for pdflatex; or what has been declared
 % via \DeclareGraphicsExtensions.
-%\caption{Simulation Results.}
+%\caption{Simulation results for the network.}
 %\label{fig_sim}
 %\end{figure}
 
@@ -551,18 +543,26 @@ Subsubsection text here.
 %\hfil
 %\subfloat[Case II]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}%
 %\label{fig_second_case}}
-%\caption{Simulation results.}
+%\caption{Simulation results for the network.}
 %\label{fig_sim}
 %\end{figure*}
 %
 % Note that often IEEE papers with subfigures do not employ subfigure
 % captions (using the optional argument to \subfloat[]), but instead will
 % reference/describe all of them (a), (b), etc., within the main caption.
-
-
-% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the 
-% \caption command should come BEFORE the table. Table text will default to
-% \footnotesize as IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables.
+% Be aware that for subfig.sty to generate the (a), (b), etc., subfigure
+% labels, the optional argument to \subfloat must be present. If a
+% subcaption is not desired, just leave its contents blank,
+% e.g., \subfloat[].
+
+
+% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the
+% \caption command should come BEFORE the table and, given that table
+% captions serve much like titles, are usually capitalized except for words
+% such as a, an, and, as, at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to
+% and up, which are usually not capitalized unless they are the first or
+% last word of the caption. Table text will default to \footnotesize as
+% IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables.
 % The \label must come after \caption as always.
 %
 %\begin{table}[!t]
@@ -585,12 +585,16 @@ Subsubsection text here.
 %\end{table}
 
 
-% Note that IEEE does not put floats in the very first column - or typically
-% anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, in-text middle ("here")
-% positioning is not used. Most IEEE journals use top floats exclusively.
-% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals, places footnotes above bottom
-% floats. This can be corrected via the \fnbelowfloat command of the
-% stfloats package.
+% Note that the IEEE does not put floats in the very first column
+% - or typically anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also,
+% in-text middle ("here") positioning is typically not used, but it
+% is allowed and encouraged for Computer Society conferences (but
+% not Computer Society journals). Most IEEE journals/conferences use
+% top floats exclusively. 
+% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places
+% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the
+% \fnbelowfloat command of the stfloats package.
+
 
 
 
@@ -626,7 +630,7 @@ Appendix one text goes here.
 Appendix two text goes here.
 
 
-% use section* for acknowledgement
+% use section* for acknowledgment
 \section*{Acknowledgment}
 
 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex
index 9096200ab01..fd99722b8ac 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex
@@ -1,15 +1,15 @@
 
 %% bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex
-%% V1.4
-%% 2012/12/27
+%% V1.4a
+%% 2014/09/17
 %% by Michael Shell
 %% See:
 %% http://www.michaelshell.org/
 %% for current contact information.
 %%
 %% This is a skeleton file demonstrating the use of IEEEtran.cls
-%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8 or later) with an IEEE Computer
-%% Society journal paper.
+%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8a or later) with an IEEE
+%% Computer Society journal paper.
 %%
 %% Support sites:
 %% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/
@@ -41,38 +41,24 @@
 %% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **
 %%
 %% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex,
-%%                    bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex,
-%%                    bare_jrnl_transmag.tex
+%%                    bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_conf_compsoc.tex,
+%%                    bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex, bare_jrnl_transmag.tex
 %%*************************************************************************
 
+
 % *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system  ***
 % *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform ***
-% *** with production work. IEEE's font choices can trigger bugs that do  ***
-% *** not appear when using other class files.                            ***
+% *** with production work. IEEE's font choices and paper sizes can       ***
+% *** trigger bugs that do not appear when using other class files.       ***                          ***
 % The testflow support page is at:
 % http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/
 
 
-
-
-% Note that the a4paper option is mainly intended so that authors in
-% countries using A4 can easily print to A4 and see how their papers will
-% look in print - the typesetting of the document will not typically be
-% affected with changes in paper size (but the bottom and side margins will).
-% Use the testflow package mentioned above to verify correct handling of
-% both paper sizes by the user's LaTeX system.
-%
-% Also note that the "draftcls" or "draftclsnofoot", not "draft", option
-% should be used if it is desired that the figures are to be displayed in
-% draft mode.
-%
-% The Computer Society usually requires 12pt for submissions.
-%
-\documentclass[12pt,journal,compsoc]{IEEEtran}
+\documentclass[10pt,journal,compsoc]{IEEEtran}
 %
 % If IEEEtran.cls has not been installed into the LaTeX system files,
 % manually specify the path to it like:
-% \documentclass[12pt,journal,compsoc]{../sty/IEEEtran}
+% \documentclass[10pt,journal,compsoc]{../sty/IEEEtran}
 
 
 
@@ -110,10 +96,10 @@
 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
   % IEEE Computer Society needs nocompress option
   % requires cite.sty v4.0 or later (November 2003)
-  % \usepackage[nocompress]{cite}
+  \usepackage[nocompress]{cite}
 \else
   % normal IEEE
-  % \usepackage{cite}
+  \usepackage{cite}
 \fi
 % cite.sty was written by Donald Arseneau
 % V1.6 and later of IEEEtran pre-defines the format of the cite.sty package
@@ -125,8 +111,7 @@
 % noadjust option (cite.sty V3.8 and later) if you want to turn this off
 % such as if a citation ever needs to be enclosed in parenthesis.
 % cite.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. Be sure and use
-% version 4.0 (2003-05-27) and later if using hyperref.sty. cite.sty does
-% not currently provide for hyperlinked citations.
+% version 5.0 (2009-03-20) and later if using hyperref.sty.
 % The latest version can be obtained at:
 % http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/cite/
 % The documentation is contained in the cite.sty file itself.
@@ -257,7 +242,7 @@
 
 % *** SUBFIGURE PACKAGES ***
 %\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
-%  \usepackage[caption=false,font=normalsize,labelfont=sf,textfont=sf]{subfig}
+%  \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize,labelfont=sf,textfont=sf]{subfig}
 %\else
 %  \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize]{subfig}
 %\fi
@@ -270,10 +255,10 @@
 % and invoke subfig.sty's "caption=false" package option (available since
 % subfig.sty version 1.3, 2005/06/28) as this is will preserve IEEEtran.cls
 % handling of captions.
-% Note that the Computer Society format requires a larger sans serif font
-% than the serif footnote size font used in traditional IEEE formatting
-% and thus the need to invoke different subfig.sty package options depending
-% on whether compsoc mode has been enabled.
+% Note that the Computer Society format requires a sans serif font rather
+% than the serif font used in traditional IEEE formatting and thus the need
+% to invoke different subfig.sty package options depending on whether
+% compsoc mode has been enabled.
 %
 % The latest version and documentation of subfig.sty can be obtained at:
 % http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/subfig/
@@ -391,7 +376,10 @@
 \begin{document}
 %
 % paper title
-% can use linebreaks \\ within to get better formatting as desired
+% Titles are generally capitalized except for words such as a, an, and, as,
+% at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to and up, which are usually
+% not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of the title.
+% Linebreaks \\ can be used within to get better formatting as desired.
 % Do not put math or special symbols in the title.
 \title{Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls\\ for Computer Society Journals}
 %
@@ -427,7 +415,7 @@ GA, 30332.\protect\\
 % \\ is fragile and will error, could use \hfil\break instead.
 E-mail: see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html
 \IEEEcompsocthanksitem J. Doe and J. Doe are with Anonymous University.}% <-this % stops an unwanted space
-\thanks{Manuscript received April 19, 2005; revised December 27, 2012.}}
+\thanks{Manuscript received April 19, 2005; revised September 17, 2014.}}
 
 % note the % following the last \IEEEmembership and also \thanks - 
 % these prevent an unwanted space from occurring between the last author name
@@ -450,7 +438,7 @@ E-mail: see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html
 
 
 % The paper headers
-\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~11, No.~4, December~2012}%
+\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~13, No.~9, September~2014}%
 {Shell \MakeLowercase{\textit{et al.}}: Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for Computer Society Journals}
 % The only time the second header will appear is for the odd numbered pages
 % after the title page when using the twoside option.
@@ -468,9 +456,9 @@ E-mail: see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html
 % journals, the available text space is not reduced by their presence.
 % If you want to put a publisher's ID mark on the page you can do it like
 % this:
-%\IEEEpubid{0000--0000/00\$00.00~\copyright~2012 IEEE}
+%\IEEEpubid{0000--0000/00\$00.00~\copyright~2014 IEEE}
 % or like this to get the Computer Society new two part style.
-%\IEEEpubid{\makebox[\columnwidth]{\hfill 0000--0000/00/\$00.00~\copyright~2012 IEEE}%
+%\IEEEpubid{\makebox[\columnwidth]{\hfill 0000--0000/00/\$00.00~\copyright~2014 IEEE}%
 %\hspace{\columnsep}\makebox[\columnwidth]{Published by the IEEE Computer Society\hfill}}
 % Remember, if you use this you must call \IEEEpubidadjcol in the second
 % column for its text to clear the IEEEpubid mark (Computer Society jorunal
@@ -528,25 +516,15 @@ Computer Society, IEEEtran, journal, \LaTeX, paper, template.
 
 
 
-\section{Introduction}
-% Computer Society journal papers do something a tad strange with the very
-% first section heading (almost always called "Introduction"). They place it
-% ABOVE the main text! IEEEtran.cls currently does not do this for you.
-% However, You can achieve this effect by making LaTeX jump through some
-% hoops via something like:
-%
-%\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
-%  \noindent\raisebox{2\baselineskip}[0pt][0pt]%
-%  {\parbox{\columnwidth}{\section{Introduction}\label{sec:introduction}%
-%  \global\everypar=\everypar}}%
-%  \vspace{-1\baselineskip}\vspace{-\parskip}\par
-%\else
-%  \section{Introduction}\label{sec:introduction}\par
-%\fi
-%
-% Admittedly, this is a hack and may well be fragile, but seems to do the
-% trick for me. Note the need to keep any \label that may be used right
-% after \section in the above as the hack puts \section within a raised box.
+\IEEEraisesectionheading{\section{Introduction}\label{sec:introduction}}
+% Computer Society journal (but not conference!) papers do something unusual
+% with the very first section heading (almost always called "Introduction").
+% They place it ABOVE the main text! IEEEtran.cls does not automatically do
+% this for you, but you can achieve this effect with the provided
+% \IEEEraisesectionheading{} command. Note the need to keep any \label that
+% is to refer to the section immediately after \section in the above as
+% \IEEEraisesectionheading puts \section within a raised box.
+
 
 
 
@@ -567,14 +545,14 @@ Computer Society, IEEEtran, journal, \LaTeX, paper, template.
 % and "HIS" in caps to complete the first word.
 \IEEEPARstart{T}{his} demo file is intended to serve as a ``starter file''
 for IEEE Computer Society journal papers produced under \LaTeX\ using
-IEEEtran.cls version 1.8 and later.
+IEEEtran.cls version 1.8a and later.
 % You must have at least 2 lines in the paragraph with the drop letter
 % (should never be an issue)
 I wish you the best of success.
 
 \hfill mds
  
-\hfill December 27, 2012
+\hfill September 17, 2014
 
 \subsection{Subsection Heading Here}
 Subsection text here.
@@ -605,7 +583,7 @@ Subsubsection text here.
 % where an .eps filename suffix will be assumed under latex, 
 % and a .pdf suffix will be assumed for pdflatex; or what has been declared
 % via \DeclareGraphicsExtensions.
-%\caption{Simulation Results.}
+%\caption{Simulation results for the network.}
 %\label{fig_sim}
 %\end{figure}
 
@@ -629,18 +607,26 @@ Subsubsection text here.
 %\hfil
 %\subfloat[Case II]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}%
 %\label{fig_second_case}}
-%\caption{Simulation results.}
+%\caption{Simulation results for the network.}
 %\label{fig_sim}
 %\end{figure*}
 %
 % Note that often IEEE papers with subfigures do not employ subfigure
 % captions (using the optional argument to \subfloat[]), but instead will
 % reference/describe all of them (a), (b), etc., within the main caption.
-
-
-% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the 
-% \caption command should come BEFORE the table. Table text will default to
-% \footnotesize as IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables.
+% Be aware that for subfig.sty to generate the (a), (b), etc., subfigure
+% labels, the optional argument to \subfloat must be present. If a
+% subcaption is not desired, just leave its contents blank,
+% e.g., \subfloat[].
+
+
+% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the
+% \caption command should come BEFORE the table and, given that table
+% captions serve much like titles, are usually capitalized except for words
+% such as a, an, and, as, at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to
+% and up, which are usually not capitalized unless they are the first or
+% last word of the caption. Table text will default to \footnotesize as
+% IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables.
 % The \label must come after \caption as always.
 %
 %\begin{table}[!t]
@@ -663,15 +649,16 @@ Subsubsection text here.
 %\end{table}
 
 
-% Note that IEEE does not put floats in the very first column - or typically
-% anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, in-text middle ("here")
-% positioning is not used. Most IEEE journals use top floats exclusively.
-% However, Computer Society journals sometimes do use bottom floats - bear
-% this in mind when choosing appropriate optional arguments for the
-% figure/table environments.
-% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals, places footnotes above bottom
-% floats. This can be corrected via the \fnbelowfloat command of the
-% stfloats package.
+% Note that the IEEE does not put floats in the very first column
+% - or typically anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also,
+% in-text middle ("here") positioning is typically not used, but it
+% is allowed and encouraged for Computer Society conferences (but
+% not Computer Society journals). Most IEEE journals/conferences use
+% top floats exclusively. 
+% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places
+% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the
+% \fnbelowfloat command of the stfloats package.
+
 
 
 
@@ -707,7 +694,7 @@ Appendix one text goes here.
 Appendix two text goes here.
 
 
-% use section* for acknowledgement
+% use section* for acknowledgment
 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
   % The Computer Society usually uses the plural form
   \section*{Acknowledgments}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_transmag.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_transmag.tex
index 7782e5cd54f..f4fd6db7a27 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_transmag.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_transmag.tex
@@ -1,13 +1,13 @@
 
 %% bare_jrnl_transmag.tex
-%% V1.4
-%% 2012/12/27
+%% V1.4a
+%% 2014/09/17
 %% by Michael Shell
 %% see http://www.michaelshell.org/
 %% for current contact information.
 %%
 %% This is a skeleton file demonstrating the use of IEEEtran.cls
-%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8 or later) with an IEEE 
+%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8a or later) with an IEEE 
 %% Transactions on Magnetics journal paper.
 %%
 %% Support sites:
@@ -16,16 +16,6 @@
 %% and
 %% http://www.ieee.org/
 
-
-
-% *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system  ***
-% *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform ***
-% *** with production work. IEEE's font choices can trigger bugs that do  ***
-% *** not appear when using other class files.                            ***
-% The testflow support page is at:
-% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/
-
-
 %%*************************************************************************
 %% Legal Notice:
 %% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or
@@ -50,21 +40,20 @@
 %% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **
 %%
 %% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex,
-%%                    bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex,
-%%                    bare_jrnl_transmag.tex
+%%                    bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_conf_compsoc.tex,
+%%                    bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex, bare_jrnl_transmag.tex
 %%*************************************************************************
 
-% Note that the a4paper option is mainly intended so that authors in
-% countries using A4 can easily print to A4 and see how their papers will
-% look in print - the typesetting of the document will not typically be
-% affected with changes in paper size (but the bottom and side margins will).
-% Use the testflow package mentioned above to verify correct handling of
-% both paper sizes by the user's LaTeX system.
-%
-% Also note that the "draftcls" or "draftclsnofoot", not "draft", option
-% should be used if it is desired that the figures are to be displayed in
-% draft mode.
-%
+
+% *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system  ***
+% *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform ***
+% *** with production work. IEEE's font choices and paper sizes can       ***
+% *** trigger bugs that do not appear when using other class files.       ***                          ***
+% The testflow support page is at:
+% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/
+
+
+
 \documentclass[journal,transmag]{IEEEtran}
 %
 % If IEEEtran.cls has not been installed into the LaTeX system files,
@@ -115,8 +104,7 @@
 % noadjust option (cite.sty V3.8 and later) if you want to turn this off
 % such as if a citation ever needs to be enclosed in parenthesis.
 % cite.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. Be sure and use
-% version 4.0 (2003-05-27) and later if using hyperref.sty. cite.sty does
-% not currently provide for hyperlinked citations.
+% version 5.0 (2009-03-20) and later if using hyperref.sty.
 % The latest version can be obtained at:
 % http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/cite/
 % The documentation is contained in the cite.sty file itself.
@@ -369,7 +357,10 @@
 \begin{document}
 %
 % paper title
-% can use linebreaks \\ within to get better formatting as desired
+% Titles are generally capitalized except for words such as a, an, and, as,
+% at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to and up, which are usually
+% not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of the title.
+% Linebreaks \\ can be used within to get better formatting as desired.
 % Do not put math or special symbols in the title.
 \title{Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for \textsc{Transactions on Magnetics}}
 
@@ -388,13 +379,13 @@ Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta, GA 30332 USA}
 \IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{2}Twentieth Century Fox, Springfield, USA}
 \IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{3}Starfleet Academy, San Francisco, CA 96678 USA}
 \IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{4}Tyrell Inc., 123 Replicant Street, Los Angeles, CA 90210 USA}% <-this % stops an unwanted space
-\thanks{Manuscript received December 1, 2012; revised December 27, 2012. 
+\thanks{Manuscript received December 1, 2012; revised September 17, 2014. 
 Corresponding author: M. Shell (email: http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html).}}
 
 
 
 % The paper headers
-\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~11, No.~4, December~2012}%
+\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~13, No.~9, September~2014}%
 {Shell \MakeLowercase{\textit{et al.}}: Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for Journals}
 % The only time the second header will appear is for the odd numbered pages
 % after the title page when using the twoside option.
@@ -409,7 +400,7 @@ Corresponding author: M. Shell (email: http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html)
 
 % If you want to put a publisher's ID mark on the page you can do it like
 % this:
-%\IEEEpubid{0000--0000/00\$00.00~\copyright~2012 IEEE}
+%\IEEEpubid{0000--0000/00\$00.00~\copyright~2014 IEEE}
 % Remember, if you use this you must call \IEEEpubidadjcol in the second
 % column for its text to clear the IEEEpubid mark.
 
@@ -487,15 +478,15 @@ IEEEtran, journal, \LaTeX, magnetics, paper, template.
 % Here we have the typical use of a "T" for an initial drop letter
 % and "HIS" in caps to complete the first word.
 \IEEEPARstart{T}{his} demo file is intended to serve as a ``starter file''
-for IEEE journal papers produced under \LaTeX\ using
-IEEEtran.cls version 1.8 and later.
+for IEEE \textsc{Transactions on Magnetics} journal papers produced under \LaTeX\ using
+IEEEtran.cls version 1.8a and later.
 % You must have at least 2 lines in the paragraph with the drop letter
 % (should never be an issue)
 I wish you the best of success.
 
 \hfill mds
  
-\hfill December 27, 2012
+\hfill September 17, 2014
 
 \subsection{Subsection Heading Here}
 Subsection text here.
@@ -526,7 +517,7 @@ Subsubsection text here.
 % where an .eps filename suffix will be assumed under latex, 
 % and a .pdf suffix will be assumed for pdflatex; or what has been declared
 % via \DeclareGraphicsExtensions.
-%\caption{Simulation Results.}
+%\caption{Simulation results for the network.}
 %\label{fig_sim}
 %\end{figure}
 
@@ -549,18 +540,26 @@ Subsubsection text here.
 %\hfil
 %\subfloat[Case II]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}%
 %\label{fig_second_case}}
-%\caption{Simulation results.}
+%\caption{Simulation results for the network.}
 %\label{fig_sim}
 %\end{figure*}
 %
 % Note that often IEEE papers with subfigures do not employ subfigure
 % captions (using the optional argument to \subfloat[]), but instead will
 % reference/describe all of them (a), (b), etc., within the main caption.
-
-
-% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the 
-% \caption command should come BEFORE the table. Table text will default to
-% \footnotesize as IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables.
+% Be aware that for subfig.sty to generate the (a), (b), etc., subfigure
+% labels, the optional argument to \subfloat must be present. If a
+% subcaption is not desired, just leave its contents blank,
+% e.g., \subfloat[].
+
+
+% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the
+% \caption command should come BEFORE the table and, given that table
+% captions serve much like titles, are usually capitalized except for words
+% such as a, an, and, as, at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to
+% and up, which are usually not capitalized unless they are the first or
+% last word of the caption. Table text will default to \footnotesize as
+% IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables.
 % The \label must come after \caption as always.
 %
 %\begin{table}[!t]
@@ -583,12 +582,16 @@ Subsubsection text here.
 %\end{table}
 
 
-% Note that IEEE does not put floats in the very first column - or typically
-% anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, in-text middle ("here")
-% positioning is not used. Most IEEE journals use top floats exclusively.
-% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals, places footnotes above bottom
-% floats. This can be corrected via the \fnbelowfloat command of the
-% stfloats package.
+% Note that the IEEE does not put floats in the very first column
+% - or typically anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also,
+% in-text middle ("here") positioning is typically not used, but it
+% is allowed and encouraged for Computer Society conferences (but
+% not Computer Society journals). Most IEEE journals/conferences use
+% top floats exclusively. 
+% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places
+% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the
+% \fnbelowfloat command of the stfloats package.
+
 
 
 
@@ -624,7 +627,7 @@ Appendix one text goes here.
 Appendix two text goes here.
 
 
-% use section* for acknowledgement
+% use section* for acknowledgment
 \section*{Acknowledgment}
 
 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/changelog.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/changelog.txt
index d582bec05af..08e2067a31d 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/changelog.txt
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/changelog.txt
@@ -1,12 +1,38 @@
 
 
  Changelog history of the IEEEtran LaTeX class.
- 2012/12/27
+ 2014/09/17
  by Michael Shell (MDS)
  http://www.michaelshell.org/
 
 
+ 9/2014 V1.8a (MDS) changes:
 
+ 1) Extensive rework of the compsoc mode to comply with the latest standards
+    of the IEEE Computer Society.
+
+ 2) Internal code improvements for page setup and command argument
+    processing.
+
+ 3) Fixed abstract, index terms and diamond line for compsoc technotes.
+    Thanks to Dimitris Schinianakis for reporting this problem.
+
+ 4) New cspaper option to support the special trim paper size
+    (7.875in x 10.75in) used in actual Computer Society journals. For
+    compsoc journal mode, typesetting will not be altered by the use of this
+    option.
+
+ 5) New \IEEEraisesectionheading{} command to provide for the special raised
+    first section heading of Computer Society journal papers.
+
+ 6) Increased \clubpenalty, \widowpenalty, \displaywidowpenalty to
+    discourage paragraph breaks at the first and last lines.
+    Thanks to Dirk Beyer for suggesting this change.
+
+ 7) Added lines per column console message.
+
+
+*******
  12/2012 V1.8 (MDS) changes:: 
 
  1) New transmag class option to support the IEEE Transactions on Magnetics
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/tools/changelog.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/tools/changelog.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3fb00ea0e96
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/IEEEtran/tools/changelog.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+
+
+ Changelog history of the IEEEtrantools.sty LaTeX package.
+ 2014/09/17
+ by Michael Shell (MDS)
+ http://www.michaelshell.org/
+
+
+
+2014/09/17 V1.4 (V1.8a of IEEEtran.cls) changes:
+
+ 1) Internal code improvements for command argument processing and
+    support for future features.
+
+
+*******
+12/2012 V1.3 (V1.8 of IEEEtran.cls) changes:
+
+ 1) No longer redefines the standard LaTeX itemize, enumerate and 
+    description (IED) lists by default. (e.g., the older package option
+    "retainorgcmds" is now the default behavior.) A new package option,
+    "redeflists", can be invoked to redefine the standard IED list
+    environments to their IEEE versions. IEEEitemize, IEEEenumerate and
+    IEEEdescription remain available in any case. The redeflists option
+    may not be compatible with other packages that alter the standard
+    IED list environments.
+
+ 2) Added new *-forms of \IEEEyesnumber*, \IEEEnonumber*, \IEEEyessubnumber*,
+    and \IEEEnosubnumber* (the non-star form of the latter is also new) which
+    persist across IEEEeqnarray lines until countermanded. To provide for
+    continued subequations across instances of IEEEeqnarrays as well as for
+    subequations that follow a main equation (e.g., 14, 14a, 14b ...)
+    \IEEEyessubnumber no longer automatically increments the equation number
+    on it's first invocation of a subequation group. Invoke both
+    \IEEEyesnumber\IEEEyessubnumber together to start a new
+    equation/subequation group.
+
+ 3) Hyperref links now work with IEEEeqnarray equations.
+    Thanks to Stefan M. Moser for reporting this problem.
+
+ 4) Now provides the IEEEproof environment, as well as the
+    \IEEEQEDhere, \IEEEQEDhereeqn and \IEEEQEDoff commands.
+    Also, \IEEEproofindentspace allows users to change the
+    IEEEproof indentation via \renewcommand.
+    Thanks to Mark D. Butala, Hennadiy Leontyev and Stefan M. Moser
+    for suggesting this. Special thanks to Stefan M. Moser for beta
+    testing and additional suggestions which improved IEEEproof.
+
+ 5) Revised \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{} to allow inner alignments without
+    requiring extra containing braces to prevent an incomplete \ifx error.
+    Thanks to Stefan M. Moser and Auke van der Valk for reporting this
+    problem.
+
+ 6) Added \IEEEauthorrefmark.
+
+ 7) Removed support for legacy IED list commands.
+    IEEEtrantools no longer defines or references \labelindent so as to
+    avoid namespace problems with list packages that define it.
+    Thanks to Sven Köhler for reporting the problem with enumitem.sty.
+
+
+*******
+ 1/2007 V1.2 (V1.7 of IEEEtran.cls) changes:
+
+ 1) Several commands and environments have depreciated in favor of
+    replacements with IEEE prefixes to better avoid potential future name
+    clashes with other packages. Legacy code retained to allow
+    use of the obsolete forms, but with an warning message to the
+    console during compilation:
+    \IEEEPARstart
+    For IED lists:
+    \IEEEiedlabeljustifyc, \IEEEiedlabeljustifyl, \IEEEiedlabeljustifyr,
+    \IEEEnocalcleftmargin, \IEEElabelindent, \IEEEsetlabelwidth,
+    \IEEEusemathlabelsep
+ 
+ 2) These commands/lengths now require the IEEE prefix and do not have
+    legacy support: \IEEEnormaljot.
+    For IED lists: \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin, \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor,
+    \IEEEiedlistdecl, \IEEElabelindentfactor
+
+ 3) \normalsizebaselineskip no longer provided.
+
+ 4) New \IEEEPARstart controls:
+    \IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT, \IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE, \IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE,
+    \IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE, \IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE,
+    \IEEEPARstartHOFFSET, \IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT
+    and the (output) length \IEEEPARstartletwidth.
+
+ 5) Provide for an optional argument to \bstctlcite to provide a way to
+    specify a different aux file.
+
+
+*******
+ 11/2002 V1.1 (V1.6b of IEEEtran.cls) changes:
+ 
+ 1) In addition to the IEEE IED lists, the original LaTeX IED style list
+    environments are now preserved as LaTeXitemize, LaTeXenumerate, and
+    LaTeXdescription. Also, users can now redefine \makelabel within
+    IEEE IED list controls. There may be some use for these in specialized
+    applications. Thanks to Eli Barzilay for suggesting this feature.
+
+
+*******
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtran.cls b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtran.cls
index 5e2d1839b4c..67958d9b331 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtran.cls
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtran.cls
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 %%
-%% IEEEtran.cls 2012/12/27 version V1.8
+%% IEEEtran.cls 2014/09/17 version V1.8a
 %% 
 %% This is the IEEEtran LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of 
 %% Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Transactions journals and
@@ -18,19 +18,19 @@
 %% Contributors:
 %% Gerry Murray (1993), Silvano Balemi (1993),
 %% Jon Dixon (1996), Peter N"uchter (1996),
-%% Juergen von Hagen (2000), and Michael Shell (2001-2012)
+%% Juergen von Hagen (2000), and Michael Shell (2001-2014)
 %% 
 %% 
 %% Copyright (c) 1993-2000 by Gerry Murray, Silvano Balemi, 
 %%                         Jon Dixon, Peter N"uchter,
 %%                         Juergen von Hagen
 %%                         and
-%% Copyright (c) 2001-2012 by Michael Shell
+%% Copyright (c) 2001-2014 by Michael Shell
 %%
-%% Current maintainer (V1.3 to V1.8): Michael Shell
-%%                                    See:
-%%                                    http://www.michaelshell.org/
-%%                                    for current contact information.
+%% Current maintainer (V1.3 to V1.8a): Michael Shell
+%%                                     See:
+%%                                     http://www.michaelshell.org/
+%%                                     for current contact information.
 %%
 %% Special thanks to Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau
 %% for allowing the inclusion of the \@ifmtarg command 
@@ -60,7 +60,8 @@
 %% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **
 %%
 %% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex,
-%%                    bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex
+%%                    bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_conf_compsoc.tex,
+%%                    bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex
 %% 
 %% Major changes to the user interface should be indicated by an 
 %% increase in the version numbers. If a version is a beta, it will 
@@ -109,22 +110,33 @@
 %    also want to select onecolumn.
 %    The default is final.
 %
-% letterpaper, a4paper
-%    determines paper size: 8.5in X 11in or 210mm X 297mm. CHANGING THE PAPER
-%    SIZE WILL NOT ALTER THE TYPESETTING OF THE DOCUMENT - ONLY THE MARGINS
-%    WILL BE AFFECTED. In particular, documents using the a4paper option will
+% letterpaper, a4paper, cspaper
+%    determines paper size: 8.5in X 11in, 210mm X 297mm or 7.875in X 10.75in.
+%    Changing the paper size in the standard journal and conference modes
+%    will not alter the typesetting of the document - only the margins will
+%    be affected. In particular, documents using the a4paper option will
 %    have reduced side margins (A4 is narrower than US letter) and a longer
 %    bottom margin (A4 is longer than US letter). For both cases, the top
-%    margins will be the same and the text will be horizontally centered. 
-%    For final submission to IEEE, authors should use US letter (8.5 X 11in)
-%    paper. Note that authors should ensure that all post-processing 
-%    (ps, pdf, etc.) uses the same paper specificiation as the .tex document.
-%    Problems here are by far the number one reason for incorrect margins.
-%    IEEEtran will automatically set the default paper size under pdflatex 
-%    (without requiring a change to pdftex.cfg), so this issue is more
-%    important to dvips users. Fix config.ps, config.pdf, or ~/.dvipsrc for
-%    dvips, or use the dvips -t papersize option instead as needed. See the
-%    testflow documentation
+%    margins will be the same and the text will be horizontally centered.
+%    For the compsoc conference and draft modes, it is the margins that will
+%    remain constant, and thus the text area size will vary, with changes in
+%    the paper size.
+%    The cspaper option is the special ``trim'' paper size (7.875in x 10.75in)
+%    used in the actual publication of Computer Society journals. Under
+%    compsoc journal mode, this option does not alter the typesetting of the
+%    document. Authors should invoke the cspaper option only if requested to
+%    do so by the editors of the specific journal they are submitting to.
+%    For final submission to the IEEE, authors should generally use US letter 
+%    (8.5 X 11in) paper unless otherwise instructed. Note that authors should
+%    ensure that all post-processing (ps, pdf, etc.) uses the same paper
+%    specificiation as the .tex document. Problems here are by far the number
+%    one reason for incorrect margins. IEEEtran will automatically set the
+%    default paper size under pdflatex (without requiring any change to
+%    pdftex.cfg), so this issue is more important to dvips users. Fix
+%    config.ps, config.pdf, or ~/.dvipsrc for dvips, or use the
+%    dvips -t papersize option instead as needed. For the cspaper option,
+%    the corresponding dvips paper name is "ieeecs".
+%    See the testflow documentation
 %    http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/testflow
 %    for more details on dvips paper size configuration.
 %    The default is letterpaper.
@@ -190,7 +202,7 @@
 
 
 
-\ProvidesClass{IEEEtran}[2012/12/27 V1.8 by Michael Shell]
+\ProvidesClass{IEEEtran}[2014/09/17 V1.8a by Michael Shell]
 \typeout{-- See the "IEEEtran_HOWTO" manual for usage information.}
 \typeout{-- http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/}
 \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
@@ -205,6 +217,11 @@
 \def\IEEEtransversionmajor{1}
 \def\IEEEtransversionminor{8}
 
+
+% hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting
+\def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}}
+
+
 % These do nothing, but provide them like in article.cls
 \newif\if@restonecol
 \newif\if@titlepage
@@ -247,16 +264,19 @@
 
 % V1.6b internal flag to show if using a4paper
 \newif\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper       \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse
-
+% V1.6b internal flag to show if using cspaper
+\newif\if@IEEEusingcspaper          \@IEEEusingcspaperfalse
 
 
 % IEEEtran class scratch pad registers
 % dimen
 \newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
 \newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
+\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
 % count
 \newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountA
 \newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountB
+\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountC
 % token list
 \newtoks\@IEEEtrantmptoksA
 
@@ -272,21 +292,32 @@
 
 
 
-\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{11in}%
-                            \setlength{\paperwidth}{8.5in}%
+\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\setlength{\paperwidth}{8.5in}%
+                            \setlength{\paperheight}{11in}%
                             \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse
+                            \@IEEEusingcspaperfalse
                             \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{letter}%
                             \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{8.5in}%
                             \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{11in}}
 
 
-\DeclareOption{a4paper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}%
-                        \setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}%
+\DeclareOption{a4paper}{\setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}%
+                        \setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}%
                         \@IEEEusingAfourpapertrue
+                        \@IEEEusingcspaperfalse
                         \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{a4}%
                         \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{210mm}%
                         \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{297mm}}
 
+% special paper option for compsoc journals
+\DeclareOption{cspaper}{\setlength{\paperwidth}{7.875in}%
+                        \setlength{\paperheight}{10.75in}%
+                        \@IEEEusingcspapertrue
+                        \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse
+                        \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{ieeecs}%
+                        \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{7.875in}%
+                        \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{10.75in}}
+
 \DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse
                         \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue\CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse}
 \DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue\@mparswitchtrue
@@ -342,6 +373,65 @@
 
 
 
+%% -- Command Argument Scanning Support Functions --
+% 
+% usage: \@IEEEextracttoken*{}
+% \@IEEEextracttoken fully expands its argument (which it then stores in
+% \@IEEEextracttokenarg) via \edef and then the meaning of the first
+% nonbrace (but including the empty group) token found is assigned via \let
+% to \@IEEEextractedtoken as well as stored in the macro
+% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro. Tokens that would otherwise be discarded during
+% the acquisition of the first are stored in \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded,
+% however their original relative brace nesting depths are not guaranteed to
+% be preserved.
+% If the argument is empty, or if a first nonbrace token does not exist (or
+% is an empty group), \@IEEEextractedtoken will be \relax and
+% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro and \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded will be empty.
+%
+% For example:
+% \@IEEEextracttoken{{{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}}
+% results in:
+%
+% \@IEEEextracttokenarg          ==> a macro containing {{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}
+% \@IEEEextractedtoken           ==> the letter a
+% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro      ==> a macro containing a
+% \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded ==> a macro containing bcd{ef}g
+%
+% the *-star form, \@IEEEextracttoken*, does not expand its argument
+% contents during processing.
+\def\@IEEEextracttoken{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextracttokendef=\def\@@IEEEextracttoken}{\let\@IEEEextracttokendef=\edef\@@IEEEextracttoken}}
+
+\def\@@IEEEextracttoken#1{\@IEEEextracttokendef\@IEEEextracttokenarg{#1}\relax
+\def\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded{}\relax % initialize to empty
+% if the macro is unchanged after being acquired as a single undelimited argument
+% with anything after it being stripped off as a delimited argument
+% we know we have one token without any enclosing braces. loop until this is true.
+\let\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@IEEEextracttokenarg
+\loop
+  % trap case of an empty argument as this would cause a problem with
+  % \@@@IEEEextracttoken's first (nondelimited) argument acquisition
+  \ifx\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@empty
+    \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{}\relax
+  \else
+    \expandafter\@@@IEEEextracttoken\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER\relax
+  \fi
+  \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup
+  \else
+    \let\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup=\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro
+\repeat
+% we can safely do a \let= here because there should be at most one token
+% the relax is needed to handle the case of no token found
+\expandafter\let\expandafter\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\relax}
+
+\def\@@@IEEEextracttoken#1#2\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER{\def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{#1}\relax
+\def\@@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded{#2}\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+{\expandafter\@@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded}}
+%%
+%% -- End of Command Argument Scanning Support Functions --
+
+
+
 % Computer Society conditional execution command
 \long\def\@IEEEcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\relax#1\relax\fi\relax}
 % inverse
@@ -465,15 +555,31 @@
 \newdimen\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
 \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\baselineskip
 
+
+
+%% ******* WARNING! *******
+%%
+%% Authors should not alter font sizes, baselineskip ("leading"),
+%% margins or other spacing values in an attempt to squeeze more
+%% material on each page.
+%%
+%% The IEEE's own typesetting software will restore the correct
+%% values when re-typesetting/proofing the submitted document,
+%% possibly resulting in unexpected article over length charges.
+%%
+%% ******* WARNING! *******
+
+
+% 9pt option defaults
 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
 \typeout{-- This is a 9 point document.}
-\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9}{11.0476pt}}%
-\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.0476pt}%
+\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9}{11.0476pt}}
+\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.0476pt}
 \normalsize
-\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt%
-\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
-\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus3pt%
-\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt
+\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3pt minus 1pt
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 3pt
+\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3pt minus 1pt
 \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5}{10pt}}
 \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}}
 \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}}
@@ -486,18 +592,17 @@
 \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17}{20pt}}
 \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20}{24pt}}
 \fi
-
-
-% Check if we have selected 10 points
+%
+% 10pt option defaults
 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten
 \typeout{-- This is a 10 point document.}
-\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10}{12.00pt}}%
-\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12pt}%
+\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10}{12.00pt}}
+\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12pt}
 \normalsize
-\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt%
-\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
-\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus4pt%
-\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt
+\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4pt minus 2pt
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4pt
+\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4pt minus 2pt
 \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9}{10pt}}
 \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}}
 \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}}
@@ -510,18 +615,17 @@
 \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}}
 \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
 \fi
-
-
-% Check if we have selected 11 points
+%
+% 11pt option defaults
 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven
 \typeout{-- This is an 11 point document.}
-\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11}{13.3846pt}}%
-\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.3846pt}%
+\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11}{13.3846pt}}
+\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.3846pt}
 \normalsize
-\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt%
-\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
-\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus5pt%
-\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt
+\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5pt minus 3pt
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5pt
+\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5pt minus 3pt
 \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}}
 \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}}
 \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}}
@@ -534,18 +638,17 @@
 \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}}
 \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
 \fi
-
-
-% Check if we have selected 12 points
+%
+% 12pt option defaults
 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve
 \typeout{-- This is a 12 point document.}
-\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12}{13.92pt}}%
-\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.92pt}%
+\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12}{13.92pt}}
+\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.92pt}
 \normalsize
-\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt%
-\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
-\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus6pt%
-\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt
+\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6pt minus 4pt
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6pt
+\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6pt minus 4pt
 \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}}
 \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}}
 \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}}
@@ -560,11 +663,206 @@
 \fi
 
 
+
+% V1.8a compsoc font sizes
+% compsoc font sizes use bp "Postscript" point units (1/72in) 
+% rather than the traditional pt (1/72.27)
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+% -- compsoc defaults --
+% ** will override some of these values later **
+% 9pt
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
+\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9bp}{11bp}}
+\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11bp}
+\normalsize
+\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+\abovedisplayshortskip 0bp plus 3bp
+\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp
+\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5bp}{10bp}}
+\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8bp}{9bp}}
+\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7bp}{8bp}}
+\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5bp}{6bp}}
+% sublargesize is the same as large - 10bp
+\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10bp}{12bp}}
+\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10bp}{12bp}}
+\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12bp}{14bp}}
+\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14bp}{17bp}}
+\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17bp}{20bp}}
+\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20bp}{24bp}}
+\fi
+%
+% 10pt
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten
+\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10bp}{12bp}}
+\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12bp}
+\normalsize
+\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4bp
+\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp
+\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9bp}{10bp}}
+\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8bp}{9bp}}
+\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7bp}{8bp}}
+\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5bp}{6bp}}
+% sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11bp
+\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{11bp}{13.5bp}}
+\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12bp}{14bp}}
+\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14bp}{17bp}}
+\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17bp}{20bp}}
+\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20bp}{24bp}}
+\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24bp}{28bp}}
+\fi
+%
+% 11pt
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven
+\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11bp}{13.5bp}}
+\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.5bp}
+\normalsize
+\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5bp
+\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp
+\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10bp}{12bp}}
+\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9bp}{10.5bp}}
+\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8bp}{9bp}}
+\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6bp}{7bp}}
+% sublargesize is the same as large - 12bp
+\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12bp}{14bp}}
+\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12bp}{14bp}}
+\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14bp}{17bp}}
+\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17bp}{20bp}}
+\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20bp}{24bp}}
+\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24bp}{28bp}}
+\fi
+%
+% 12pt
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve
+\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12bp}{14bp}}%
+\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{14bp}%
+\normalsize
+\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6bp
+\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp
+\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10bp}{12bp}}
+\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9bp}{10.5bp}}
+\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8bp}{9bp}}
+\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6bp}{7bp}}
+% sublargesize is the same as large - 14bp
+\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14bp}{17bp}}
+\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14bp}{17bp}}
+\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17bp}{20bp}}
+\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20bp}{24bp}}
+\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22bp}{26bp}}
+\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24bp}{28bp}}
+\fi
+%
+% -- override defaults: compsoc journals use special normalsizes --
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
+% 
+% compsoc conferences
+% 9pt
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
+\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9bp}{10.8bp}}
+\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{10.8bp}
+\normalsize
+\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+\abovedisplayshortskip 0bp plus 3bp
+\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp
+\fi
+% 10pt
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten
+\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10bp}{11.2bp}}
+\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.2bp}
+\normalsize
+\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4bp
+\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp
+\fi
+% 11pt
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven
+\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11bp}{13.2bp}}
+\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.2bp}
+\normalsize
+\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5bp
+\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp
+\fi
+% 12pt
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve
+\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12bp}{14.4bp}}
+\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{14.4bp}
+\normalsize
+\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6bp
+\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp
+\fi
+% 
+% compsoc nonconferences
+\else
+% 9pt
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
+\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9bp}{10.8bp}}
+\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{10.8bp}
+\normalsize
+\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+\abovedisplayshortskip 0bp plus 3bp
+\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp
+\fi
+% 10pt
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten
+% the official spec is 9.5bp with 11.4bp leading for 10pt,
+% but measurements of proofs suggest upto 11.723bp leading
+% here we'll use 11.54bp which gives 61 lines per column
+% with the standard compsoc margins
+\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9.5bp}{11.54bp}}
+\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.54bp}
+\normalsize
+\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4bp
+\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp
+\fi
+% 11pt
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven
+\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11bp}{13.2bp}}
+\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.2bp}
+\normalsize
+\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5bp
+\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp
+\fi
+% 12pt
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve
+\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12bp}{14.4bp}}
+\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{14.4bp}
+\normalsize
+\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6bp
+\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp
+\fi
+\fi\fi
+
+
+
+
 % V1.6 The Computer Modern Fonts will issue a substitution warning for
-% 24pt titles (24.88pt is used instead) increase the substitution
-% tolerance to turn off this warning
-\def\fontsubfuzz{.9pt}
-% However, the default (and correct) Times font will scale exactly as needed.
+% 24pt titles (24.88pt is used instead, but the default and correct
+% Times font will scale exactly as needed) increase the substitution
+% tolerance to turn off this warning.
+% 
+% V1.8a, the compsoc bp font sizes can also cause bogus font substitution
+% warnings with footnote or scriptsize math and the $\bullet$ itemized
+% list of \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks. So, increase this to 1.5pt or more.
+\def\fontsubfuzz{1.7bp}
 
 
 % warn the user in case they forget to use the 9pt option with
@@ -611,7 +909,7 @@
            \baselinestretch\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
 \fi
 
-\normalsize % make \baselinestretch take affect
+\small\normalsize % make \baselinestretch take affect
 
 
 
@@ -669,6 +967,21 @@
 \def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.55}
 
 
+% compsoc nonconference papers use Palatino,
+% tweak settings to better match the proofs
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else
+% for medium (normal weight)
+\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.28}
+\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.21}
+\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.47}
+% for bold
+\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.305}
+\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.21}
+\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.52}
+\fi\fi
+
+
 % command to revise the interword spacing for the current font under TeX:
 % \fontdimen2 = nominal interword space
 % \fontdimen3 = interword stretch
@@ -731,7 +1044,569 @@
 
 
 
-% V1.6 
+
+
+% -- V1.8a page setup commands --
+
+% The default sample text for calculating margins
+% Note that IEEE publications use \scriptsize for headers and footers.
+\def\IEEEdefaultsampletext{\normalfont\normalsize gT}
+\def\IEEEdefaultheadersampletext{\normalfont\scriptsize T}% IEEE headers default to uppercase
+\def\IEEEdefaultfootersampletext{\normalfont\scriptsize gT}
+
+
+
+% usage: \IEEEsettextwidth{inner margin}{outer margin}
+% Sets \textwidth to allow the specified inner and outer margins
+% for the current \paperwidth.
+\def\IEEEsettextwidth#1#2{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\paperwidth
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB#1\relax
+\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB#2\relax
+\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
+\textwidth\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}
+
+
+
+% usage: \IEEEsetsidemargin{mode: i, o, c, a}{margin/offset}
+% Sets \oddsidemargin and \evensidemargin to yield the specified margin
+% of the given mode.
+% The available modes are:
+% i = inner margin
+% o = outer margin
+% c = centered, with the given offset
+% a = adjust the margins using the given offset
+% For the offsets, positive values increase the inner margin.
+% \textwidth should be set properly for the given margins before calling this
+% function.
+\def\IEEEsetsidemargin#1#2{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #2\relax
+\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax
+% check for mode errors
+\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty
+  \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
+  Defaulting to `i'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space are: i, o, c and a.}\relax
+  \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=i\relax
+  \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{i}\relax
+\else
+  \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
+    \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
+  \fi
+\fi
+% handle each mode
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax
+  \advance\oddsidemargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+\else
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax
+  \oddsidemargin\paperwidth
+  \advance\oddsidemargin by -\textwidth
+  \divide\oddsidemargin by 2\relax
+  \advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax
+  \advance\oddsidemargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+\else
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken o\relax
+  \oddsidemargin\paperwidth
+  \advance\oddsidemargin by -\textwidth
+  \advance\oddsidemargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
+  \advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax
+\else
+  \if\@IEEEextractedtoken i\relax
+  \else
+    \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
+    Defaulting to `i'}%
+    {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space are: i, o, c  and a.}%
+  \fi
+  \oddsidemargin\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
+  \advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax
+\fi\fi\fi
+% odd and even side margins both mean "inner" for single sided pages
+\evensidemargin\oddsidemargin
+% but are mirrors of each other when twosided is in effect
+\if@twoside
+  \evensidemargin\paperwidth
+  \advance\evensidemargin by -\textwidth
+  \advance\evensidemargin by -\oddsidemargin
+  % have to compensate for both the builtin 1in LaTex offset
+  % and the fact we already subtracted this offset from \oddsidemargin
+  \advance\evensidemargin -2in\relax
+\fi}
+
+
+
+% usage: \IEEEsettextheight[sample text]{top text margin}{bottom text margin}
+% Sets \textheight based on the specified top margin and bottom margin.
+% Takes into consideration \paperheight, \topskip, and (by default) the
+% the actual height and depth of the \IEEEdefaultsampletext text. 
+\def\IEEEsettextheight{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsettextheight}{\@IEEEsettextheight[\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}}
+\def\@IEEEsettextheight[#1]#2#3{\textheight\paperheight\relax
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #2\relax
+  \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% subtract top margin
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #3\relax
+  \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% subtract bottom margin
+  \advance \textheight by \topskip% add \topskip
+  % subtract off everything above the top, and below the bottom, baselines
+  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
+  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}
+
+
+
+\newdimen\IEEEquantizedlength
+\IEEEquantizedlength 0sp\relax
+\newdimen\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff
+\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff 0sp\relax
+\def\IEEEquantizedlengthint{0}
+
+% usage: \IEEEquantizelength{mode: d, c, i}{base unit}{length}
+% Sets the length \IEEEquantizedlength to be an integer multiple of the given
+% (nonzero) base unit such that \IEEEquantizedlength approximates the given
+% length.
+% \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff is a length equal to the difference between the
+% \IEEEquantizedlength and the given length.
+% \IEEEquantizedlengthint is a macro containing the integer number of base units
+% in \IEEEquantizedlength.
+% i.e., \IEEEquantizedlength =  \IEEEquantizedlengthint * base unit
+% The mode determines how \IEEEquantizedlength is quantized:
+% d = always decrease (always round down \IEEEquantizeint)
+% c = use the closest match
+% i = always increase (always round up \IEEEquantizeint)
+% In anycase, if the given length is already quantized,
+% \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff will be set to zero.
+\def\IEEEquantizelength#1#2#3{\begingroup
+% work in isolation so as not to externally disturb the \@IEEEtrantmp
+% variables
+% load the argument values indirectly via \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff
+% in case the user refers to our \@IEEEtrantmpdimenX, \IEEEquantizedlength,
+% etc. in the arguments. we also will work with these as counters,
+% i.e., in sp units
+% A has the base unit
+\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff #2\relax\relax\relax\relax
+\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff
+% B has the input length
+\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff #3\relax\relax\relax\relax
+\@IEEEtrantmpcountB\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountB sp\relax
+% \@IEEEtrantmpcountC will have the quantized int
+% \IEEEquantizedlength will have the quantized length
+% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC will have the quantized diff
+% initialize them to zero as this is what will be
+% exported if an error occurs
+\@IEEEtrantmpcountC 0\relax
+\IEEEquantizedlength 0sp\relax
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC 0sp\relax
+% extract mode
+\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax
+% check for mode errors
+\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty
+  \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
+  Defaulting to `d'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEquantizelength\space are: d, c and i.}\relax
+  \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=d\relax
+  \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{d}\relax
+\else
+  \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
+    \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEquantizelength\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
+  \fi
+\fi
+% check for base unit is zero error
+\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=0\relax
+\@IEEEclspkgerror{Base unit is zero in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
+  \string\IEEEquantizedlength\space and \string\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\space are set to zero}{Division by zero is not allowed.}\relax
+\else% base unit is nonzero
+  % \@IEEEtrantmpcountC carries the number of integer units
+  % in the quantized length (integer length \ base)
+  \@IEEEtrantmpcountC\@IEEEtrantmpcountB\relax
+  \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax
+  % \IEEEquantizedlength has the (rounded down) quantized length
+  % = base * int
+  \IEEEquantizedlength\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+  \multiply\IEEEquantizedlength by \@IEEEtrantmpcountC\relax
+  % \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC has the difference
+  % = quantized length - length
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
+  % trap special case of length being already quantized
+  % to avoid a roundup under i option
+  \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC=0sp\relax
+  \else % length not is already quantized
+    % set dimenA to carry the upper quantized (absolute value) difference:
+    % quantizedlength + base - length
+    \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \IEEEquantizedlength\relax
+    \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
+    % set dimenB to carry the lower quantized (absolute value) difference:
+    % length - quantizedlength
+    \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\IEEEquantizedlength\relax
+    % handle each mode
+    \if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax
+      % compare upper and lower amounts, select upper if lower > upper
+      \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+        % use upper
+        \advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax
+        \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax
+        \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
+      \else% <=. uselower
+        % no need to do anything for lower, use output values already setup
+      \fi
+    \else% not mode c
+    \if\@IEEEextractedtoken i\relax
+      % always round up under i mode
+      \advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax
+      \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax
+      \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
+    \else
+      \if\@IEEEextractedtoken d\relax
+      \else
+        \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
+        Defaulting to `d'}%
+        {Valid modes for \string\IEEEquantizelength\space are: d, c, and i.}\relax
+      \fi % if d
+      % no need to do anything for d, use output values already setup
+    \fi\fi % if i, c
+  \fi % if length is already quantized
+\fi% if base unit is zero
+% globally assign the results to macros we use here to escape the enclosing
+% group without needing to call \global on any of the \@IEEEtrantmp variables.
+% \@IEEEtrantmpcountC has the quantized int
+% \IEEEquantizedlength has the quantized length
+% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC has the quantized diff
+\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthintmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
+\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax
+\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
+\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\relax
+\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthdiffmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
+\endgroup
+% locally assign the outputs here from the macros
+\expandafter\IEEEquantizedlength\@IEEEquantizedlengthmacro sp\relax
+\expandafter\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\@IEEEquantizedlengthdiffmacro sp\relax
+\edef\IEEEquantizedlengthint{\@IEEEquantizedlengthintmacro}\relax}
+
+
+
+\newdimen\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff
+\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff 0sp\relax
+
+% usage: \IEEEquantizetextheight[base unit]{mode: d, c, i}
+% Sets \textheight to be an integer multiple of the current \baselineskip
+% (or the optionally specified base unit) plus the first (\topskip) line.
+% \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff is a length equal to the difference between
+% the new quantized and original \textheight.
+% \IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc is a macro containing the integer number of
+% lines per column under the quantized \textheight. i.e.,
+% \textheight = \IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc * \baselineskip + \topskip
+% The mode determines how \textheight is quantized:
+% d = always decrease (always round down the number of lines per column)
+% c = use the closest match
+% i = always increase (always round up the number of lines per column)
+% In anycase, if \textheight is already quantized, it will remain unchanged,
+% and \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff will be set to zero.
+% Depends on: \IEEEquantizelength
+\def\IEEEquantizetextheight{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEquantizetextheight}{\@IEEEquantizetextheight[\baselineskip]}}
+\def\@IEEEquantizetextheight[#1]#2{\begingroup
+% use our \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff as a scratch pad
+% we need to subtract off \topskip before quantization
+\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\textheight
+\advance\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff by -\topskip\relax
+\IEEEquantizelength{#2}{#1}{\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff}
+% add back \topskip line
+\advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \topskip
+\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlengthint\relax
+\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax
+% globally assign the results to macros we use here to escape the enclosing
+% group without needing to call \global on any of the \@IEEEtrantmp variables.
+\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightlpcmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
+\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax
+\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
+\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\relax
+\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightdiffmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
+\endgroup
+% locally assign the outputs here from the macros
+\textheight\@IEEEquantizedtextheightmacro sp\relax
+\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\@IEEEquantizedtextheightdiffmacro sp\relax
+\edef\IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc{\@IEEEquantizedtextheightlpcmacro}}
+
+
+
+% usage: \IEEEsettopmargin[sample text]{mode: t, b, c, a, q}{margin/offset}
+% Sets \topmargin based on the specified vertical margin.
+% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \headheight, \headsep,
+% \topskip, and (by default) the the actual height (or, for the bottom, depth)
+% of the \IEEEdefaultsampletext text.
+% The available modes are:
+% t = top margin
+% b = bottom margin
+% c = vertically centered, with the given offset
+% a = adjust the vertical margins using the given offset
+% q = adjust the margins using \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff and the given offset
+% For the offsets, positive values increase the top margin.
+% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip and \textheight should be set properly for the
+% given margins before calling this function.
+\def\IEEEsettopmargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsettopmargin}{\@IEEEsettopmargin[\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}}
+\def\@IEEEsettopmargin[#1]#2#3{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #3\relax
+\@IEEEextracttoken{#2}\relax
+% check for mode errors
+\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty
+  \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
+  Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space are: t, b, c, a and q.}\relax
+  \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax
+  \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax
+\else
+  \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
+    \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
+  \fi
+\fi
+% handle each mode
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax
+  \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+\else
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken q\relax
+  % we need to adjust by half the \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff value
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\relax
+  \divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax
+  % a positive \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff means we need to reduce \topmargin
+  % because \textheight has been lenghtened
+  \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
+  \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+\else
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax
+  \topmargin\paperheight
+  \advance\topmargin by -\textheight
+  % \textheight includes \topskip, but we should not count topskip whitespace here, backout
+  \advance \topmargin by \topskip
+  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
+  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
+  \divide\topmargin by 2\relax
+  \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+\else
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax
+  \topmargin\paperheight
+  \advance\topmargin by -\textheight
+  % \textheight includes \topskip, but we should not count topskip whitespace here, backout
+  \advance \topmargin by \topskip
+  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
+  \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+\else
+  \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax
+  \else
+    \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
+    Defaulting to `t'}%
+    {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space are: t, b, c, a and q.}\relax
+  \fi
+  \topmargin\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
+\fi\fi % if t, b, c
+% convert desired top margin into actual \topmargin
+% this is not done for the q or a modes because they are only adjustments
+\advance \topmargin by -\topskip
+\advance \topmargin by -1in
+\advance \topmargin by -\headheight
+\advance \topmargin by -\headsep
+\fi\fi % if q, a
+}
+
+
+
+% usage: \IEEEsetheadermargin[header sample][text sample]{mode: t, b, c, a}{margin/offset}
+% Differentially adjusts \topmargin and \headsep (such that their sum is unchanged)
+% based on the specified header margin.
+% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \headheight, \topskip, and (by default)
+% the actual height (or depth) of the \IEEEdefaultheadersampletext and
+% \IEEEdefaultsampletext text.
+% The available modes are:
+% t = top margin (top of the header text to the top of the page)
+% b = bottom margin (bottom of the header text to the top of the main text)
+% c = vertically centered between the main text and the top of the page,
+%     with the given offset
+% a = adjust the vertical position using the given offset
+% For the offsets, positive values move the header downward.
+% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip and \topmargin should be set properly before
+% calling this function.
+\def\IEEEsetheadermargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsetheadermargin}{\@IEEEsetheadermargin[\IEEEdefaultheadersampletext]}}
+\def\@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1]{\@ifnextchar [{\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1]}{\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1][\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}}
+\def\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1][#2]#3#4{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #4\relax
+\@IEEEextracttoken{#3}\relax
+% check for mode errors
+\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty
+  \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
+  Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space are: t, b, c, and a.}\relax
+  \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax
+  \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax
+\else
+  \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
+    \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
+  \fi
+\fi
+% handle each mode
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax
+  % No need to do anything here and can pass through the adjustment
+  % value as is. The end adjustment of \topmargin and \headsep will
+  % do all that is needed
+\else
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax
+  % get the bottom margin
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax
+  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topskip
+  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
+  % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header bottom margin
+  % subtract from it the top header margin
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB -1in\relax % take into consideration the system 1in offset of the top margin
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\topmargin
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\headheight
+  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
+  % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the difference between the bottom and top margins
+  % we need to adjust by half this amount to center the header
+  \divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax
+  % and add to offset
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
+\else
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax
+  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topskip
+  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
+  % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header bottom margin
+  % get the difference between the actual and the desired
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
+\else
+  \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax
+  \else
+    \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
+    Defaulting to `t'}%
+    {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space are: t, b, c and a.}\relax
+  \fi
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % take into consideration the system 1in offset of the top margin
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topmargin
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \headheight
+  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
+  % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header top margin
+  % get the difference between the desired and the actual
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
+\fi\fi % if t, b, c
+\fi % if a
+% advance \topmargin by the needed amount and reduce \headsep by the same
+% so as not to disturb the location of the main text
+\advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+\advance\headsep by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+}
+
+
+
+% usage: \IEEEsetfootermargin[footer sample][text sample]{mode: t, b, c, a}{margin/offset}
+% Adjusts \footskip based on the specified footer margin.
+% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \paperheight, \headheight,
+% \headsep, \textheight and (by default) the actual height (or depth) of the
+% \IEEEdefaultfootersampletext and \IEEEdefaultsampletext text.
+% The available modes are:
+% t = top margin (top of the footer text to the bottom of the main text)
+% b = bottom margin (bottom of the footer text to the bottom of page)
+% c = vertically centered between the main text and the bottom of the page,
+%     with the given offset
+% a = adjust the vertical position using the given offset
+% For the offsets, positive values move the footer downward.
+% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip, \topmargin, and \textheight should be set
+% properly before calling this function.
+\def\IEEEsetfootermargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsetfootermargin}{\@IEEEsetfootermargin[\IEEEdefaultfootersampletext]}}
+\def\@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1]{\@ifnextchar [{\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1]}{\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1][\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}}
+\def\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1][#2]#3#4{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #4\relax
+\@IEEEextracttoken{#3}\relax
+% check for mode errors
+\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty
+  \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
+  Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space are: t, b, c, and a.}\relax
+  \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax
+  \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax
+\else
+  \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
+    \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
+  \fi
+\fi
+% handle each mode
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax
+  % No need to do anything here and can pass through the adjustment
+  % value as is. The end adjustment of \footskip will do all that
+  % is needed
+\else
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax
+  % calculate the bottom margin
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % system 1in offset
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\topmargin\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headheight\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\textheight\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax
+  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\paperheight
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
+  % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer bottom margin
+  % now subtract off the footer top margin
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB -\footskip\relax
+  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
+  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
+  % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the difference between the bottom
+  % and top footer margins
+  % our adjustment must be half this value to center the footer
+  \divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax
+  % add to the offset
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
+\else
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax
+  % calculate the bottom margin
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % system 1in offset
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\topmargin\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headheight\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\textheight\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax
+  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\paperheight
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
+  % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer bottom margin
+  % get the difference between the actual and the desired
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
+\else
+  \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax
+  \else
+    \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
+    Defaulting to `t'}%
+    {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space are: t, b, c and a.}\relax
+  \fi
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax
+  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
+  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
+  % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer top margin
+  % get the difference between the desired and the actual
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
+\fi\fi % if t, b, c
+\fi % if a
+% advance \footskip by the needed amount
+\advance\footskip by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+}
+
+% -- End V1.8a page setup commands --
+
+
+
+
+
+% V1.6
 % LaTeX is a little to quick to use hyphenations
 % So, we increase the penalty for their use and raise
 % the badness level that triggers an underfull hbox
@@ -740,6 +1615,9 @@
 % of the box" than that under V1.5 and prior.
 % TeX default is 50
 \hyphenpenalty=750
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+\hyphenpenalty 500
+\fi
 % If we didn't adjust the interword spacing, 2200 might be better.
 % The TeX default is 1000
 \hbadness=1350
@@ -750,6 +1628,11 @@
 \binoppenalty=1000 % default 700
 \relpenalty=800     % default 500
 
+% v1.8a increase these to discourage widows and orphans
+\clubpenalty=1000          % default 150
+\widowpenalty=1000         % default 150
+\displaywidowpenalty=1000 % default  50
+
 
 % margin note stuff
 \marginparsep      10pt
@@ -772,113 +1655,115 @@
 \parskip 0ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.1ex
 
 \parindent    1.0em
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+  \parindent    1.5em
+\fi
 
-\topmargin    -49.0pt
 \headheight   12pt
-\headsep      0.25in
-
+\headsep      18pt
 % use the normal font baselineskip
 % so that \topskip is unaffected by changes in \baselinestretch
 \topskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
+
+
 % V1.8 \maxdepth defaults to 4pt, but should be font size dependent
 \maxdepth=0.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
 \textheight       58pc  % 9.63in, 696pt
-% Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
-% The normal baselineskip for each document point size is used 
-% to determine these values.
-\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=63\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi      % 63 lines/page
-\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi       % 58 lines/page
-\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=52\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi    % 52 lines/page
-\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi    % 50 lines/page
+
+% set the default top margin to 58pt
+% which results in a \topmargin of -49.59pt for 10pt documents
+\IEEEsettopmargin{t}{58pt}
+% tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/column.
+% standard is: 9pt/63 lpc; 10pt/58 lpc; 11pt/52 lpc; 12pt/50 lpc
+\IEEEquantizetextheight{c}
+% tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom
+\IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp}
 
 
 \columnsep         1pc
 \textwidth        43pc   % 2 x 21pc + 1pc = 43pc
- 
 
-% the default side margins are equal
-\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper 
-\oddsidemargin        14.32mm
-\evensidemargin       14.32mm
-\else
-\oddsidemargin        0.680in
-\evensidemargin       0.680in
-\fi
-% compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset
-\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
-\addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in}
+% set the default side margins to center the text
+\IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt}
 
 
-
-% adjust margins for conference mode
+% adjust margins for default conference mode
 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
- \topmargin        -0.25in
- % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers
- \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}
- \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}
  \textheight        9.25in % The standard for conferences (668.4975pt)
- % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=61\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi      % 61 lines/page
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=56\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi       % 56 lines/page
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi    % 50 lines/page
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi    % 48 lines/page
+ \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{0.75in}
+ % tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
+ % standard is: 9pt/61 lpc; 10pt/56 lpc; 11pt/50 lpc; 12pt/48 lpc
+ \IEEEquantizetextheight{c}
+ % tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom
+ \IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp}
 \fi
 
 
-% compsoc conference
+% compsoc text sizes, margins and spacings
 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
- % compsoc conference use a larger value for columnsep
- \columnsep 0.375in
- % compsoc conferences want 1in top margin, 1.125in bottom margin
- \topmargin        0in
- \addtolength{\topmargin}{-6pt}% we tweak this a tad to better comply with top of line stuff
- % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers
- \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}
- \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}
- \textheight        8.875in % (641.39625pt)
- % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi      % 58 lines/page
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=53\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi       % 53 lines/page
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi    % 48 lines/page
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=46\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi    % 46 lines/page 
- \textwidth 6.5in
- % the default side margins are equal
- \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper 
-  \oddsidemargin        22.45mm
-  \evensidemargin       22.45mm
- \else
-  \oddsidemargin        1in
-  \evensidemargin       1in
+ \columnsep         12bp
+ % CS specs for \textwdith are 6.875in
+ % \textwidth         6.875in
+ % however, measurements from proofs show they are using 3.5in columns
+ \textwidth         7in
+ \advance\textwidth by \columnsep
+ % set the side margins to center the text
+ \IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt}
+ % top/bottom margins to center
+ % could just set \textheight to 9.75in for all the different paper sizes
+ % and then quantize, but we'll do it the long way here to allow for easy
+ % future per-paper size adjustments
+ \IEEEsettextheight{0.625in}{0.625in}% 11in - 2 * 0.625in = 9.75in is the standard text height for compsoc journals
+ \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{0.625in}
+ \if@IEEEusingcspaper
+   \IEEEsettextheight{0.5in}{0.5in}% 10.75in - 2 * 0.5in = 9.75in
+   \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{0.5in}
  \fi
- % compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset
- \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
- \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in}
-\fi\fi
+ \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper
+   \IEEEsettextheight{24.675mm}{24.675mm}% 297mm - 2 * 24.675mm = 247.650mm (9.75in)
+   \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{24.675mm}
+ \fi
+ % tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
+ % standard is: 9pt/65 lpc; 10pt/61 lpc; 11pt/53 lpc; 12pt/49 lpc
+ \IEEEquantizetextheight{c}
+ % tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom
+ \IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp}
+
+% compsoc conference
+ \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
+  % compsoc conference use a larger value for columnsep
+  \columnsep 0.25in
+  \IEEEsettextwidth{0.75in}{0.75in}
+  % set the side margins to center the text (0.75in for letterpaper)
+  \IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt}
+  % compsoc conferences want 1in top and bottom margin
+  \IEEEsettextheight{1in}{1in}
+  \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{1in}
+  % tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
+  % standard is: 9pt/58 lpc; 10pt/53 lpc; 11pt/48 lpc; 12pt/46 lpc
+  \IEEEquantizetextheight{c}
+  % tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom
+  \IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp}
+ \fi
+\fi
 
 
 
 % draft mode settings override that of all other modes
 % provides a nice 1in margin all around the paper and extra
 % space between the lines for editor's comments
-\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls 
-  % want 1in from top of paper to text
-  \setlength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}%
-  \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}%
+\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
   % we want 1in side margins regardless of paper type
-  \oddsidemargin      0in
-  \evensidemargin     0in
-  % set the text width
-  \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}%
-  \addtolength{\textwidth}{-2.0in}%
-  \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}%
-  \addtolength{\textheight}{-2.0in}%
+  \IEEEsettextwidth{1in}{1in}
+  \IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt}
+  % want 1in top and bottom margins
+  \IEEEsettextheight{1in}{1in}
+  \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{1in}
   % digitize textheight to be an integer number of lines.
-  % this may cause the bottom margin to be off a tad
-  \addtolength{\textheight}{-1\topskip}%
-  \divide\textheight  by \baselineskip%
-  \multiply\textheight  by \baselineskip%
-  \addtolength{\textheight}{\topskip}%
+  % this may cause the top and bottom margins to be off a tad
+  \IEEEquantizetextheight{c}
+  % tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom
+  \IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp}
 \fi
 
 
@@ -898,17 +1783,8 @@
   \ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
     \edef\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
   \fi
-  \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
-  \ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside
-    \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
-  \else
-    \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
-  \fi
-  \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
-  \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in}
-  \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}
-  \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
-  \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
+  \IEEEsettextwidth{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
+  \IEEEsetsidemargin{i}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
   \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding inner side margin to \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\space and 
            outer side margin to \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
 \fi
@@ -930,25 +1806,53 @@
   \ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined
     \edef\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}
   \fi
-  \setlength{\topmargin}{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
-  \addtolength{\topmargin}{-1in}
-  \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}
-  \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}
-  \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}
-  \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
-  \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}
-  % in the default format we use the normal baselineskip as topskip
-  % we only need 0.7 of this to clear typical top text and we need
-  % an extra 0.3 spacing at the bottom for descenders. This will
-  % correct for both.
-  \addtolength{\topmargin}{-0.3\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}
+  \IEEEsettextheight{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}
+  \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
   \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding top text margin to \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\space and 
            bottom text margin to \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
 \fi
 
 
 
+% default to center header and footer text in the margins
+\IEEEsetheadermargin{c}{0pt}
+\IEEEsetfootermargin{c}{0pt}
 
+% adjust header and footer positions for compsoc journals
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+  \ifCLASSOPTIONjournal
+    \IEEEsetheadermargin{b}{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}
+    \IEEEsetfootermargin{t}{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}
+  \fi
+\fi
+
+
+% V1.8a display lines per column info message on user's console
+\def\IEEEdisplayinfolinespercolumn{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\textheight
+% topskip represents only one line even if > baselineskip
+\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -1\topskip
+\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
+\@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
+\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by \baselineskip
+% need to add one line to include topskip (first) line
+\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 1
+% save lines per column value as text
+\edef\@IEEEnumlinespercolumninfotxt{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountB}
+% backout topskip advance to allow direct \@IEEEtrantmpcountA comparison
+\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by -1
+% restore value as text height (without topskip) rather than just as number of lines
+\multiply\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by \baselineskip
+% is the column height an integer number of lines per column?
+\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpcountB
+\edef\@IEEEnumlinespercolumnexactinfotxt{exact}
+\else
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax
+\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpcountB sp\relax
+\edef\@IEEEnumlinespercolumnexactinfotxt{approximate, difference = \the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}
+\fi
+\typeout{-- Lines per column: \@IEEEnumlinespercolumninfotxt\space (\@IEEEnumlinespercolumnexactinfotxt).}}
+% delay execution till start of document to allow for user changes
+\AtBeginDocument{\IEEEdisplayinfolinespercolumn}
 
 
 
@@ -1131,6 +2035,9 @@
 % This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED
 % list labels and the list text, when normal text is used for
 % the labels.
+% compsoc uses a larger value here, but we'll set that later
+% in the class so that this code block area can be extracted
+% as-is for IEEEtrantools.sty
 \newdimen\IEEEiednormlabelsep
 \IEEEiednormlabelsep 0.6em
 
@@ -1144,6 +2051,9 @@
 % This controls the extra vertical separation put above and
 % below each IED list. IEEE usually puts a little extra spacing
 % around each list. However, this spacing is barely noticeable.
+% compsoc uses a larger value here, but we'll set that later
+% in the class so that this code block area can be extracted
+% as-is for IEEEtrantools.sty
 \newskip\IEEEiedtopsep
 \IEEEiedtopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
 
@@ -1460,6 +2370,14 @@
 \makebox[\labelwidth][r]{\normalfont #1}\fi\fi}
 
 
+% compsoc uses a larger value for the normal labelsep
+% and also extra spacing above and below each list
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+  \IEEEiednormlabelsep 1.2em
+  \IEEEiedtopsep 6pt plus 3pt minus 3pt
+\fi
+
+
 % VERSE and QUOTE
 % V1.7 define environments with newenvironment
 \newenvironment{verse}{\let\\=\@centercr
@@ -1476,7 +2394,6 @@
 % \titlepage
 % provided only for backward compatibility. \maketitle is the correct
 % way to create the title page. 
-\newif\if@restonecol
 \def\titlepage{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
     \else \newpage \fi \thispagestyle{empty}\c@page\z@}
 \def\endtitlepage{\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi}
@@ -1638,7 +2555,7 @@
 \def\indexname{Index}
 \def\figurename{Fig.}
 \def\tablename{TABLE}
-\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\figurename{Figure}\def\tablename{Table}}
+\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\figurename{Figure}}
 \def\partname{Part}
 \def\appendixname{Appendix}
 \def\abstractname{Abstract}
@@ -1685,7 +2602,7 @@
 \floatsep 0.85\baselineskip plus  0.2\baselineskip minus  0.2\baselineskip
 \textfloatsep 1.55\baselineskip plus  0.2\baselineskip minus  0.4\baselineskip
 \@fptop 0pt plus 1fil
-\@fpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil 
+\@fpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil
 \@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil
 \def\topfraction{0.9}
 \def\bottomfraction{0.4}
@@ -1727,6 +2644,10 @@
 % but only \abovecaptionskip is used above figure captions and *below* table
 % captions
 \setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.5\baselineskip}
+% compsoc journals are a little more generous
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal
+  \setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.75\baselineskip}
+\fi\fi
 \setlength\belowcaptionskip{0pt}
 % V1.6 create hooks in case the caption spacing ever needs to be
 % overridden by a user
@@ -1762,19 +2683,19 @@
 % test if is a for a figure or table
 \ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
 % if a table, do table caption
-\normalsize\bgroup\par\centering\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}\nobreakspace #2}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup%
+\footnotesize\bgroup\par\centering\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace\scshape #2}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup%
 \@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
 % if not a table, format it as a figure
 \else
 \@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
-\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}\nobreakspace #2}%
+\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace #2}%
 \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
 % if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
-\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}\nobreakspace}%
-\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
+\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace}%
+\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\footnotesize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
 % if caption is shorter than a line, center
 \else%
-\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
+\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
 \fi\fi}
 %
 \else% nonconference compsoc
@@ -1782,19 +2703,19 @@
 % test if is a for a figure or table
 \ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
 % if a table, do table caption
-\normalsize\bgroup\par\centering\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #1}\\{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #2}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup%
+\footnotesize\bgroup\par\centering\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize #1}\\{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize #2}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup%
 \@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
 % if not a table, format it as a figure
 \else
 \@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
-\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}\nobreakspace #2}%
+\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace #2}%
 \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
 % if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
-\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}\nobreakspace}%
-\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
+\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace}%
+\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
 % if caption is shorter than a line, left justify
 \else%
-\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
+\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
 \fi\fi}
 \fi
 %
@@ -1872,6 +2793,174 @@
 
 
 
+%% -- Command Argument Scanning Support Functions --
+%% V1.8a 
+
+% usage: \@IEEEstripouterbraces*{}
+% \@IEEEstripouterbraces fully expands its argument (which it then stores
+% in \@IEEEstripouterbracesarg) via \edef, then removes any outer enclosing
+% braces, and finally stores the result in the macro
+% \@IEEEstrippedouterbraces.
+%
+% For example:
+% \@IEEEstripouterbraces{{{{ab}c}}}
+% results in:
+%
+% \@IEEEstripouterbracesarg ==> a macro containing {{{ab}c}}
+% \@IEEEstrippedouterbraces ==> a macro containing {ab}c
+%
+% the *-star form,\@IEEEstripouterbraces*, does not expand the argument
+% contents during processing
+\def\@IEEEstripouterbraces{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef=\def\@@IEEEstripouterbraces}{\let\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef=\edef\@@IEEEstripouterbraces}}
+
+\def\@@IEEEstripouterbraces#1{\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg{#1}\relax
+% If the macro is unchanged after being acquired as a single delimited
+% argument, we know we have one sequence of tokens without any enclosing
+% braces. Loop until this is true.
+\loop
+  \expandafter\@@@IEEEstripouterbraces\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER
+\ifx\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg
+\else
+  \let\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces
+\repeat}
+
+\def\@@@IEEEstripouterbraces#1\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER{\def\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces{#1}}
+
+
+
+% usage: \@IEEEextractgroup*{}
+% \@IEEEextractgroup fully expands its argument (which it then stores in
+% \@IEEEextractgrouparg) via \edef and then assigns the first "brace group"
+% of tokens to the macro \@IEEEextractedgroup.
+% The remaining groups, if any, are stored in the macro
+% \@IEEEextractedgroupremain. If the argument does not contain the requisite
+% groups, the respective macros will be defined to be empty.
+% There is an asymmetry in that \@IEEEextractedgroup is stripped of its first
+% outer grouping while \@IEEEextractedgroupremain retains even the outer
+% grouping (if present) that originally identified it as a group.
+%
+% For example:
+% \@IEEEextractgroup{{{ab}}{c{de}}}
+% results in:
+%
+% \@IEEEextractgrouparg       ==> a macro containing {{ab}}{c{de}}
+% \@IEEEextractedgroup        ==> a macro containing {ab}
+% \@IEEEextractedgroupremain  ==> a macro containing {c{de}}
+%
+% The *-star form, \@IEEEextractgroup*, does not expand its argument
+% contents during processing.
+\def\@IEEEextractgroup{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextractgroupdef=\def\@@IEEEextractgroup}{\let\@IEEEextractgroupdef=\edef\@@IEEEextractgroup}}
+
+\def\@@IEEEextractgroup#1{\@IEEEextractgroupdef\@IEEEextractgrouparg{#1}\relax
+% trap the case of an empty extracted group as this would cause problems with
+% \@IEEEextractgroupremain's argument acquisition
+\ifx\@IEEEextractgrouparg\@empty
+  \def\@IEEEextractedgroup{}\relax
+  \def\@IEEEextractedgroupremain{}\relax
+\else
+  % We have to use some dirty tricks here. We want to insert {} around
+  % whatever remains after the first group so that TeX's argument scanner
+  % will preserve any originally enclosing braces as well as provide an
+  % empty argument to acquire even if there isn't a second group.
+  % In this first of two dirty tricks, we put a } at the end of the structure
+  % we are going to extract from. The \ifnum0=`{\fi keeps TeX happy to allow
+  % what would otherwise be an unbalanced macro definition for
+  % \@@IEEEextractgroup to be acceptable to it.
+  \ifnum0=`{\fi\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroupremain\@IEEEextractgrouparg}\relax
+\fi}
+
+% In the second part of the dirty tricks, we insert a leading { right after
+% the first group is acquired, but before the remainder is. Again, the
+% \ifnum0=`}\fi keeps TeX happy during definition time, but will disappear
+% during run time.
+\def\@IEEEextractgroupremain#1{\def\@IEEEextractedgroup{#1}\expandafter\@@IEEEextractgroupremain\expandafter{\ifnum0=`}\fi}
+
+\def\@@IEEEextractgroupremain#1{\def\@IEEEextractedgroupremain{#1}}
+
+
+
+% \@IEEEextracttoken relocated at top because margin setting commands rely on it
+
+
+
+% usage: \@IEEEextracttokengroups*{}
+% \@IEEEextracttokengroups fully expands its argument (which it then stores
+% in \@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg) and then assigns the first "brace group" of
+% tokens (with the outermost braces removed) to the macro
+% \@IEEEextractedfirstgroup.
+% The meaning of the first nonbrace (but including the empty group) token
+% within this first group is assigned via \let to \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken
+% as well as stored in the macro \@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro. If a first
+% nonbrace token does not exist (or is an empty group), these will be \relax
+% and empty, respectively.  Tokens that would otherwise be discarded during
+% the acquisition of the first token in the first group are stored in
+% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded, however their original relative brace
+% nesting depths are not guaranteed to be preserved.
+% The first group within this first group is stored in the macro
+% \@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup.
+% Likewise for the next group after the first: \@IEEEextractednextgroup,
+% \@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup, \@IEEEextractednextgroupfirsttoken,
+% \@IEEEextractednextgroupfirsttokenmacro, and 
+% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded.
+% All tokens/groups after the first group, including any enclosing braces,
+% are stored in the macro \@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain which will
+% be empty if none exist.
+%
+% For example:
+% \@IEEEextracttokengroups{{{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}}
+% will result in:
+%
+% \@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg             ==> a macro containing {{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}
+% \@IEEEextractedfirstgroup               ==> a macro containing {ab}{cd}
+% \@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain    ==> a macro containing {{ef}g}
+% \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken               ==> the letter a
+% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro          ==> a macro containing a
+% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded     ==> a macro containing bcd
+% \@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup          ==> a macro containing ab
+% \@IEEEextractednextgroup                ==> a macro containing {ef}g
+% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken           ==> the letter e
+% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokenmacro      ==> a macro containing e
+% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded ==> a macro containing fg
+% \@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup           ==> a macro containing ef
+%
+% If given an empty argument, \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken and
+% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken will be set to \relax
+% and all the macros will be empty.
+% the *-star form, \@IEEEextracttokengroups*, does not expand its argument
+% contents during processing.
+%
+% Depends on: \@IEEEextractgroup, \@IEEEextracttoken
+\def\@IEEEextracttokengroups{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef=\def\@@IEEEextracttokengroups}{\let\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef=\edef\@@IEEEextracttokengroups}}
+\def\@@IEEEextracttokengroups#1{\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef\@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg{#1}\relax
+% begin extraction, these functions are safe with empty arguments
+% first group
+\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg}\relax
+\let\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup
+\let\@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain\@IEEEextractedgroupremain
+\expandafter\@IEEEextracttoken\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup}\relax
+\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttoken\@IEEEextractedtoken
+\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro
+\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded
+% first first group
+\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup}\relax
+\let\@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup
+% next group
+\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain}\relax
+\let\@IEEEextractednextgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup
+\expandafter\@IEEEextracttoken\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractednextgroup}\relax
+\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken\@IEEEextractedtoken
+\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttokenmacro\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro
+\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded
+% next first group
+\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractednextgroup}\relax
+\let\@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup}
+
+
+%% -- End of Command Argument Scanning Support Functions --
+
+
+
+
 %%
 %% START OF IEEEeqnarray DEFINITIONS
 %%
@@ -1882,9 +2971,6 @@
 %% I don't make the claim that my work here is even near their calibre. ;)
 
 
-% hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting
-\def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}}
-
 \newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojot% flag to indicate if the environment was called as the star form
 \@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojotfalse
 
@@ -2533,7 +3619,7 @@ Using a default centering column instead}%
    #1\relax% allow user to override defaults
    \let\\\@IEEEeqnarraycr% replace newline with one that can put in eqn. numbers
    \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@% col. count = 0 for first line
-   \@IEEEbuildpreamble #2\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA 
+   \@IEEEbuildpreamble{#2}\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA 
    % put in the column for the equation number
    \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first
    \toks0={##}%
@@ -2728,7 +3814,7 @@ $$\@ignoretrue}
    \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides
    #1\relax% allow user to override defaults
    \let\\\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr% replace newline with one that allows optional spacing
-   \@IEEEbuildpreamble #4\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA
+   \@IEEEbuildpreamble{#4}\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA
    % add an isolation column to the preamble to stop \\'s {} from getting into the last col
    \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first
    \toks0={##}%
@@ -2739,16 +3825,15 @@ $$\@ignoretrue}
    % begin the alignment
    \everycr{}%
    % use only the very first token to determine the positioning
-   % this stops some problems when the user uses more than one letter,
-   % but is probably not worth the effort
-   % \noindent is used as a delimiter
-   \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
-   \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#2\relax\relax\noindent
-   % \@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded
+   \@IEEEextracttoken{#2}\relax
+   \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
+     \typeout{** WARNING: IEEEeqnarraybox position specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
+   \fi
+   % \@IEEEextractedtoken has the first token, the rest are ignored
    % if we need to put things into and hbox and go into math mode, do so now
    \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW \leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\fi%
    % use the appropriate vbox type
-   \if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken c\relax%
+   \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax%
    \vcenter\else\vbox\fi\fi\bgroup%
    \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines
    \ifx#3\relax\halign\else\halign to #3\relax\fi%
@@ -2796,8 +3881,10 @@ $$\@ignoretrue}
 
 
 
-% starts the halign preamble build
-\def\@IEEEbuildpreamble{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register
+% usage: \@IEEEbuildpreamble{column specifiers}
+% starts the halign preamble build 
+% the assembled preamble is put in \@IEEEtrantmptoksA
+\def\@IEEEbuildpreamble#1{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register
 \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=u%current column type is not yet known
 \let\@IEEEBPprevtype=s%the previous column type was the start
 \let\@IEEEBPnexttype=u%next column type is not yet known
@@ -2813,17 +3900,19 @@ $$\@ignoretrue}
 % record the default end glues
 \edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart}%
 \edef\@IEEEBPendglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend}%
+\edef\@IEEEedefMACRO{#1}\relax% fully expand the preamble to support macro containers
 % now parse the user's column specifications
-\@@IEEEbuildpreamble}
+% \ignorespaces is used as a delimiter, need at least one trailing \relax because
+% \@@IEEEbuildpreamble looks into the future 
+\expandafter\@@IEEEbuildpreamble\@IEEEedefMACRO\ignorespaces\relax\relax}
 
 
+% usage: \@@IEEEbuildpreamble{current column}{next column}
 % parses and builds the halign preamble
 \def\@@IEEEbuildpreamble#1#2{\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEbuildpreamble%
 % use only the very first token to check the end
-% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here
-\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
-\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent
-\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else%
+\@IEEEextracttokengroups{#1}\relax
+\ifx\@IEEEextractedfirsttoken\ignorespaces\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else%
 % identify current and next token type
 \@IEEEgetcoltype{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurtype}{1}% current, error on invalid
 \@IEEEgetcoltype{#2}{\@IEEEBPnexttype}{0}% next, no error on invalid next
@@ -2843,8 +3932,10 @@ $$\@ignoretrue}
 \fi\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble{#2}}
 
 
+% usage: \@@IEEEfinishpreamble{discarded}
 % executed just after preamble build is completed
 % warn about zero cols, and if prevtype type = u, put in end tabskip glue
+% argument is not used
 \def\@@IEEEfinishpreamble#1{\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols<1\relax
 \@IEEEclspkgerror{No column specifiers declared for IEEEeqnarray}%
 {At least one column type must be declared for each IEEEeqnarray.}%
@@ -2853,42 +3944,44 @@ $$\@ignoretrue}
 \if\@IEEEBPprevtype u\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue}\fi}
 
 
-% Identify and return the column specifier's type code
-\def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{%
-% use only the very first token to determine the type
-% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here
-\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
-\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent
-% \@IEEEgrabfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded
+% usage: \@IEEEgetcoltype{col specifier}{\output}{error more}
+% Identify and return the column specifier's type code in the given
+% \output macro:
 % n = number
 % g = glue (any other char in catagory 12)
 % c = letter
-% e = \end
+% e = \ignorespaces (end of sequence)
 % u = undefined
-% third argument: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char
+% error mode: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char
+\def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{%
+% use only the very first token to determine the type
+\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax
+% \@IEEEextractedtoken has the first token, the rest are discarded
 \let#2=u\relax% assume invalid until know otherwise
-\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let#2=e\else
-\ifcat\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences
-\if0\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if1\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if2\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if3\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if4\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if5\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if6\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if7\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if8\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if9\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\ifcat,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=g\relax
-\else\ifcat a\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\ifx\@IEEEextractedtoken\ignorespaces\let#2=e\else
+\ifcat\@IEEEextractedtoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences
+\if0\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
+\if1\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
+\if2\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
+\if3\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
+\if4\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
+\if5\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
+\if6\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
+\if7\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
+\if8\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
+\if9\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
+\ifcat,\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=g\relax
+\else\ifcat a\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
 \if#2u\relax
 \if0\noexpand#3\relax\else\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid character in column specifications}%
 {Only letters, numerals and certain other symbols are allowed \MessageBreak
 as IEEEeqnarray column specifiers.}\fi\fi}
 
 
-% identify the current letter referenced column
-% if invalid, use a default column
+% usage: \@IEEEgetcurcol{col specifier}
+% verify the letter referenced column exists
+% and return its name in \@IEEEBPcurcolname
+% if column specifier is invalid, use the default column @IEEEdefault
 \def\@IEEEgetcurcol#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
 \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{#1}\else% invalid column name
 \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#1" in column specifications.\MessageBreak
@@ -2897,7 +3990,9 @@ Using a default centering column instead}%
 \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}\fi}
 
 
-% identify and return the predefined (punctuation) glue value
+% usage: \@IEEEgetcurglue{glue specifier}{\output}
+% identify the predefined (punctuation) glue value
+% and return it in the given output macro
 \def\@IEEEgetcurglue#1#2{%
 % ! = \! (neg small)  -0.16667em (-3/18 em)
 % , = \, (small)       0.16667em ( 3/18 em)
@@ -2915,10 +4010,10 @@ Using a default centering column instead}%
 % value for 1em.
 % 
 % use only the very first token to determine the type
-% this prevents errant tokens from getting in the main text
-% \noindent is used as a delimiter here
-\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
-\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent
+\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax
+\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
+  \typeout{** WARNING: IEEEeqnarray predefined inter-column glue type specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
+\fi
 % get the math font 1em value
 % LaTeX2e's NFSS2 does not preload the fonts, but \IEEEeqnarray needs
 % to gain access to the math (\textfont2) font's spacing parameters.
@@ -2931,18 +4026,18 @@ Using a default centering column instead}%
 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\fontdimen6\textfont2\relax%
 % identify the glue value based on the first token
 % we discard anything after the first
-\if!\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
-\if,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
-\if:\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
-\if;\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
-\if'\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
-\if"\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
-\if.\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
-\if/\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else
-\if?\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
-\if *\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else
-\if+\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else
-\if-\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else
+\if!\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if,\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if:\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if;\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if'\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if"\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if.\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if/\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else
+\if?\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if *\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else
+\if+\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else
+\if-\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else
 \edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}%
 \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid predefined inter-column glue type "#1" in\MessageBreak
 column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak
@@ -2951,7 +4046,7 @@ column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak
 IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
 
 
-
+% usage: \@IEEEprocessNcol{digit}
 % process a numerical digit from the column specification
 % and look up the corresponding user defined glue value
 % can transform current type from n to g or a as the user defined glue is acquired
@@ -3159,11 +4254,11 @@ between column types.}%
       % do not repeat pubid if using peer review option
       \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
       \else
-         \footskip 0pt%
          \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
-           \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
-           \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
+           \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{0ex}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
+           \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{0ex}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
          \else
+           \footskip 0pt%
            \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
            \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
          \fi
@@ -3184,11 +4279,11 @@ between column types.}%
 \else
    % non-draft mode footers
    \if@IEEEusingpubid
-      \footskip 0pt%
       \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
-        \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
-        \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
+        \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{0ex}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
+        \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{0ex}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
       \else
+        \footskip 0pt%
         \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
         \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
       \fi
@@ -3296,19 +4391,19 @@ between column types.}%
 
 \def\@biblabel#1{[#1]}
 
-% compsoc journals left align the reference numbers
-\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]\hfill}}
+% compsoc journals and conferences left align the reference numbers
+\@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]\hfill}}
 
 % controls bib item spacing
 \def\IEEEbibitemsep{0pt plus .5pt}
 
-\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\IEEEbibitemsep{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}}
+\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\IEEEbibitemsep{0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}}
 
 
 \def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\refname}%
     \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}%
     % V1.6 add some rubber space here and provide a command trigger
-    \footnotesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\small}\vskip 0.3\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip%
+    \footnotesize\vskip 0.3\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip%
     \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
     {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
     \leftmargin\labelwidth
@@ -3368,8 +4463,8 @@ between column types.}%
 % FONT CONTROLS AND SPACINGS FOR CONFERENCE MODE AUTHOR NAME AND AFFILIATION BLOCKS
 % 
 % The default font styles for the author name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
-\def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}}
-\def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}}
+\def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize}
+\def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize}
 % The default if the user does not use an author block
 \def\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize}
 
@@ -3564,6 +4659,8 @@ between column types.}%
 \hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}
 
 
+
+
 % user command to invoke the title page
 \def\maketitle{\par%
   \begingroup%
@@ -3584,7 +4681,7 @@ between column types.}%
         \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%
            \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
         \else
-           \twocolumn[\@maketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace\@IEEEaftertitletext]%
+           \twocolumn[{\IEEEquantizevspace{\@maketitle}[\IEEEquantizedisabletitlecmds]{0pt}[-\topskip]{\baselineskip}{\@IEEENORMtitlevspace}{\@IEEEMINtitlevspace}\@IEEEaftertitletext}]%
         \fi
      \else
         \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
@@ -3603,12 +4700,12 @@ between column types.}%
   \let\thanks\relax}
 
 
-
 % V1.8 parbox to format \@IEEEtitleabstractindextext
 \long\def\@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{1\textwidth}{#1}}
 % V1.8 compsoc is partial width
 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
-\long\def\@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{0.915\textwidth}{#1}}
+% comparison with proofs suggests it's in the range of 92.1-92.3%
+\long\def\@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{0.922\textwidth}{\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\rightskip\@flushglue\leftskip\z@skip}#1}}
 \fi
 
 % formats the Title, authors names, affiliations and special paper notice
@@ -3616,14 +4713,13 @@ between column types.}%
 % spaces to enter the definition - use % at the end of each line
 \def\@maketitle{\newpage
 \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering%
-\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technotes
-   {\bfseries\large\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@title\par}\vskip 1.3em{\lineskip .5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@author
-   \@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
-   \@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\par
-   \hfill\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
+\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technotes, V1.8a abstract and index terms are not treated differently for compsoc technotes
+   {\bfseries\large\@IEEEcompsoconly{\Large\sffamily}\@title\par}\vskip 1.3em{\lineskip .5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\large\sffamily}\@author
+   \@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par}\relax
 \else% not a technote
    \vskip0.2em{\Huge\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag\bfseries\LARGE\fi\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\normalfont\normalsize\vskip 2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
-   \bfseries\Large}\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par%
+   \bfseries\Large}\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\vskip 0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}\@title\par}\relax
+   \@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\vskip 0.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}\vskip1.0em\par%
    % V1.6 handle \author differently if in conference mode
    \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
       {\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace%
@@ -3634,8 +4730,8 @@ between column types.}%
          {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace%
           \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par
           {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
-           \@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill
-           \@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
+           \@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\par\noindent\hfill
+           \IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
       \else% journal, peerreview or transmag
          \ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag
             % transmag also handles author names just like conference mode
@@ -3647,19 +4743,44 @@ between column types.}%
          \else% journal or peerreview
            {\lineskip.5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@author\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par
            {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
-            \@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill
-            \@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
+            \@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\par\noindent\hfill
+            \IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
          \fi
       \fi
    \fi
 \fi\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup}
 
 
-
 % V1.7 Computer Society "diamond line" which follows index terms for nonconference papers
-\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\hspace{7.5pt}%
-\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}%
-\hspace{7.5pt}\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\relax}
+% V1.8a full width diamond line for single column use
+\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\nobreak\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak
+\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}\nobreak
+\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\relax}
+% V1.8a narrower width diamond line for double column use
+\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 2.5cm\nobreak\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak
+\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}\nobreak
+\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 2.5cm\relax}
+% V1.8a bare core without rules to base a last resort on for very narrow linewidths
+\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineiii{\mbox{}\nobreak\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak
+\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}\nobreak
+\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak\mbox{}\relax}
+
+% V1.8a allow \IEEEcompsocdiamondline to adjust for different linewidths.
+% Use \@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei if its width is less than 0.66\linewidth (0.487 nominal for single column)
+% if not, fall back to \@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii if its width is less than 0.75\linewidth (0.659 nominal for double column)
+% if all else fails, try to make a custom diamondline based on the abnormally narrow linewidth
+\def\IEEEcompsocdiamondline{\settowidth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei}\relax
+\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA<0.66\linewidth\relax\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei\relax
+\else
+\settowidth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii}\relax
+\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA<0.75\linewidth\relax\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii\relax
+\else
+\settowidth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineiii}\relax
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\linewidth\relax
+\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{-1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\relax
+\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 0.33\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineiii\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 0.33\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
+\fi\fi}
+
 
 % V1.7 standard LateX2e \thanks, but with \itshape under compsoc. Also make it a \long\def
 % We also need to trigger the one-shot footnote rule
@@ -3672,6 +4793,7 @@ between column types.}%
         \protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule\relax}\ignorespaces#1}}}
 \let\@thanks\@empty
 
+
 % V1.7 allow \author to contain \par's. This is needed to allow \thanks to contain \par.
 \long\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}}
 
@@ -3679,7 +4801,7 @@ between column types.}%
 % in addition to setting up IEEEitemize, we need to remove a baselineskip space above and
 % below it because \list's \pars introduce blank lines because of the footnote struts.
 \def\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist{\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}%
-\setlength{\IEEElabelindent}{0pt}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}%
+\setlength{\IEEElabelindent}{0pt}\setlength{\labelsep}{1.2em}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}%
 \setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}\setlength{\topsep}{0.5\baselineskip}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\relax}
 
 
@@ -3688,7 +4810,7 @@ between column types.}%
 
 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
 % V1.7 compsoc bullet item \thanks
-% also, we need to redefine this to destroy the argument in \@IEEEdynamictitlevspace
+% also, we need to redefine this to destroy the argument in \IEEEquantizevspace
 \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\relax\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse\footnotemark
     \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks
         \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\itshape\protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule
@@ -3711,7 +4833,7 @@ between column types.}%
 \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
 \def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\@IEEEcleardoublepage{empty}%
 \ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn
-\twocolumn[\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace]
+\twocolumn[{\IEEEquantizevspace{\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle}[\IEEEquantizedisabletitlecmds]{0pt}[-\topskip]{\baselineskip}{\@IEEENORMtitlevspace}{\@IEEEMINtitlevspace}}]
 \else
 \newpage\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip
 \fi
@@ -3752,95 +4874,253 @@ between column types.}%
 \fi}}
 
 
-% V1.6
-% This is a dynamically determined rigid spacer between the title/authors 
-% and the main text. This is used only for single column titles over two 
-% column text (most common)
-% This is bit tricky because we have to ensure that the textheight of the
-% main text is an integer multiple of \baselineskip
-% otherwise underfull vbox problems may develop in the second column of the
-% text on the titlepage
-% The possible use of \IEEEpubid must also be taken into account.
-\def\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace{{%
-    % we run within a group so that all the macros can be forgotten when we are done
-    \long\def\thanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \thanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height
-    \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height
-    \normalfont\normalsize% we declare more descriptive variable names
-    \let\@IEEEmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%height of the main text columns
-    \let\@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%height of the main text columns with integer # lines
-    % set the nominal and minimum values for the title spacer
-    % the dynamic algorithm will not allow the spacer size to
-    % become less than \@IEEEMINtitlevspace - instead it will be
-    % lengthened
-    % default to journal values
-    \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{2.5\baselineskip}%
-    \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{2\baselineskip}%
-    % conferences and technotes need tighter spacing
-    \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%conference
-     \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}%
-     \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}%
-    \fi
-    \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%technote
-      \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}%
-      \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}%
-    \fi%
-    % get the height that the title will take up
-    \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
-       \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle}}%
-    \else
-       \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@maketitle}}%
-    \fi
-    \@IEEEmaintextheight=-\@IEEEmaintextheight% title takes away from maintext, so reverse sign
-    % add the height of the page textheight
-    \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by \textheight%
-    % correct for title pages using pubid
-    \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
-       % peerreview papers use the pubid on the cover page only.
-       % And the cover page uses a static spacer.
-       \if@IEEEusingpubid\advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEpubidpullup\fi
-    \fi%
-    % subtract off the nominal value of the title bottom spacer
-    \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEENORMtitlevspace%
-    % \topskip takes away some too
-    \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\topskip%
-    % calculate the column height of the main text for lines
-    % now we calculate the main text height as if holding
-    % an integer number of \normalsize lines after the first
-    % and discard any excess fractional remainder
-    % we subtracted the first line, because the first line
-    % is placed \topskip into the maintext, not \baselineskip like the
-    % rest of the lines.
-    \@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEmaintextheight%
-    \divide\@IEEEINTmaintextheight  by \baselineskip%
-    \multiply\@IEEEINTmaintextheight  by \baselineskip%
-    % now we calculate how much the title spacer height will
-    % have to be reduced from nominal (\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight is always
-    % a positive value) so that the maintext area will contain an integer
-    % number of normal size lines
-    % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer
-    % need \@IEEEINTmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register
-    \let\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight=\@IEEEINTmaintextheight%
-    \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEmaintextheight%
-    \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by \baselineskip%
-    % this is the calculated height of the spacer
-    % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer
-    % need \@IEEEmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register
-    \let\@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEEmaintextheight%
-    \@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEENORMtitlevspace% set the nominal value
-    % we go with the reduced length if it is smaller than an increase
-    \ifdim\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight < 0.5\baselineskip\relax%
-     \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight%
-     % if the resulting spacer is too small back out and go with an increase instead
-     \ifdim\@IEEECOMPENSATElen<\@IEEEMINtitlevspace\relax%
-      \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip%
-     \fi%
-    \else%
-     % go with an increase because it is closer to the nominal than a decrease
-     \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight%
-     \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip%
-    \fi%
-    % set the calculated rigid spacer
-    \vspace{\@IEEECOMPENSATElen}}}
+% set the nominal and minimum values for the quantized title spacer
+% the quantization algorithm will not allow the spacer size to
+% become less than \@IEEEMINtitlevspace - instead it will be lengthened
+% default to journal values
+\def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{2.5\baselineskip}
+\def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{2\baselineskip}
+% conferences and technotes need tighter spacing
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference
+  \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}
+  \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}
+\fi
+\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote
+  \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}
+  \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}
+\fi
+
+
+% V1.8a
+\def\IEEEquantizevspace{\begingroup\@ifstar{\@IEEEquantizevspacestarformtrue\@IEEEquantizevspace}{\@IEEEquantizevspacestarformfalse\@IEEEquantizevspace}}
+% \IEEEquantizevspace[output dimen register]{object}[object decl]
+%                    {top baselineskip}
+%                    [offset][prevdepth][lineskip limit][lineskip]
+%                    {unit height}{nominal vspace}{minimum vspace}
+%
+% Calculates and creates the vspace needed to make the combined height with
+% the given object an integer multiple of the given unit height. This command
+% is more general than the older \@IEEEdynamictitlevspace it replaces.
+%
+% The star form has no effect at present, but is reserved for future use.
+%
+% If the optional argument [output dimen register] is given, the calculated
+% vspace height is stored in the given output dimen (or skip) register
+% and no other action is taken, otherwise the object followed by a vspace*
+% of the appropriate height is evaluated/output.
+%
+% The optional object decl (declarations) is code that is evaluated just
+% before the object's height is evaluated. Its intented purpose is to allow
+% for the alteration or disabling of code within the object during internal
+% height evaluation (e.g., \long\def\thanks#1{\relax} ).
+% This special code is not invoked if/when the object is rendered at the end.
+%
+% The nominal vspace is the target value of the added vspace and the minimum
+% vspace is the lower allowed limit. The vspacer will be the value that achieves
+% integral overall height, in terms of the given unit height, that is closest
+% to the nominal vspace and that is not less than the specified minimum vspace.
+%
+% The line spacing algorithm of TeX is somewhat involved and requires special
+% care with regard to the first line of a vertical list (which is indicated
+% when \prevdepth is -1000pt or less). top baselineskip specifies the
+% baselineskip or topskip used prior to the object. If the height of the
+% first line of the object is greater than the given top baselineskip, then
+% the top baselineskip is subtracted from the height of the first line and
+% that difference is considered along with the rest of the object height
+% (because the object will be shifted down by an amount = 
+% top line height - top baselineskip). Otherwise, the height of the first line
+% of the object is ignored as far as the calculations are concerned.
+% This algorithm is adequate for objects that appear at the top of a page
+% (e.g., titles) where \topskip spacing is used.
+%
+% However, as explained on page 78 of the TeXbook, interline spacing is more
+% complex when \baselineskip is being used (indicated by \prevdepth > 
+% -1000pt). The four optional parameters offset, prevdepth, lineskip limit and
+% lineskip are assumed to be equal to be 0pt, \prevdepth, \lineskiplimit and
+% \lineskip, respectively, if they are omitted.
+%
+% The prevdepth is the depth of the line before the object, the lineskip limit
+% specifies how close the top of the object can come to the bottom of the
+% previous line before \baselineskip is ignored and \lineskip is inserted
+% between the object and the line above it. Lineskip does not come into
+% play unless the first line of the object is high enough to "get too close"
+% (as specified by lineskiplimit) to the line before it. The the prevdepth,
+% lineskip limit, and lineskip optional parameters are not needed for the
+% first object/line on a page (i.e., prevdepth <= -1000pt) where the simplier
+% \topskip spacing rules are in effect.
+%
+% Offset is a manual adjustment that is added to the height calculations of
+% object irrespective of the value of \prevdepth. It is useful when the top
+% baselineskip will result in a noninteger unit height object placement even
+% if the object itself has integral height. e.g., a footnotesize baselineskip
+% is used before the object, thus an offset of, say -3pt, can be given as a
+% correction.
+
+% Common combinations of these parameters include:
+%
+% top baselineskip:   (and default values for offset, prevdepth, etc.)
+% \topskip            % for objects that appear at the top of a page
+% \maxdimen           % always ignore the height of the top line
+% 0pt                 % always consider any positive height of the top line
+%
+% for objects to appear inline in normal text:
+% top baselineskip = \baselineskip
+%
+% set prevdepth = -1000pt and top baselineskip = 0pt to consider the
+% overall height of the object without any other external skip
+% consideration
+
+\newif\if@IEEEquantizevspacestarform       % flag to indicate star form
+\newif\if@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenreg % flag to indicate output dimen register is to be used
+% Use our own private registers because the object could contain a
+% structure that uses the existing tmp scratch pad registers
+\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeheightA
+\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeheightB
+\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeheightC
+\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth % need to save this early as can change
+\newcount\@IEEEquantizemultiple
+\newbox\@IEEEquantizeboxA
+
+
+\def\@IEEEquantizevspace{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenregtrue\@@IEEEquantizevspace}{\@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenregfalse\@@IEEEquantizevspace[]}}
+
+
+\long\def\@@IEEEquantizevspace[#1]#2{\relax
+% acquire and store
+% #1 optional output dimen register
+% #2 object
+\edef\@IEEEquantizeoutdimenreg{#1}\relax
+% allow for object specifications that contain parameters
+\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={#2}\relax
+\long\edef\@IEEEquantizeobject{\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA}\relax
+\@ifnextchar [{\@@@IEEEquantizevspace}{\@@@IEEEquantizevspace[\relax]}}
+
+\long\def\@@@IEEEquantizevspace[#1]#2{\relax
+% acquire and store
+% [#1] optional object decl, is \relax if not given by user
+% #2 top baselineskip
+% allow for object decl specifications that have parameters
+\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={#1}\relax
+\long\edef\@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl{\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA}\relax
+\edef\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip{#2}\ivIEEEquantizevspace}
+
+% acquire optional argument set and store
+% [offset][prevdepth][lineskip limit][lineskip]
+\def\ivIEEEquantizevspace{\@ifnextchar [{\@vIEEEquantizevspace}{\@vIEEEquantizevspace[0pt]}}
+\def\@vIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\edef\@IEEEquantizeoffset{#1}\@ifnextchar [{\@viIEEEquantizevspace}{\@viIEEEquantizevspace[\prevdepth]}}
+\def\@viIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth=#1\relax\@ifnextchar [{\@viiIEEEquantizevspace}{\@viiIEEEquantizevspace[\lineskiplimit]}}
+\def\@viiIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\edef\@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit{#1}\@ifnextchar [{\@viiiIEEEquantizevspace}{\@viiiIEEEquantizevspace[\lineskip]}}
+\def\@viiiIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\edef\@IEEEquantizelineskip{#1}\@ixIEEEquantizevspace}
+
+% main routine
+\def\@ixIEEEquantizevspace#1#2#3{\relax
+\edef\@IEEEquantizeunitheight{#1}\relax
+\edef\@IEEEquantizenomvspace{#2}\relax
+\edef\@IEEEquantizeminvspace{#3}\relax
+% \@IEEEquantizeoutdimenreg
+% \@IEEEquantizeobject
+% \@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl
+% \@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip
+% \@IEEEquantizeoffset
+% \@IEEEquantizeprevdepth
+% \@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit
+% \@IEEEquantizelineskip
+% \@IEEEquantizeunitheight
+% \@IEEEquantizenomvspace
+% \@IEEEquantizeminvspace
+% get overall height of object
+\setbox\@IEEEquantizeboxA\vbox{\begingroup\@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl\@IEEEquantizeobject\relax\endgroup}\relax
+\@IEEEquantizeheightA\ht\@IEEEquantizeboxA\relax
+% get height of first line of object
+\setbox\@IEEEquantizeboxA\vtop{\begingroup\@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl\@IEEEquantizeobject\relax\endgroup}\relax
+\@IEEEquantizeheightB\ht\@IEEEquantizeboxA\relax
+\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth>-1000pt\relax % prevdepth > -1000pf means full baselineskip\lineskip rules in effect
+% lineskip spacing rule takes effect if height of top line > baselineskip - prevdepth - lineskiplimit, 
+% otherwise the baselineskip rule is in effect and the height of the first line does not matter at all.
+\@IEEEquantizeheightC=\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip\relax
+\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC-\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth\relax
+\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC-\@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit\relax % this works even though \@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit is a macro because TeX allows --10pt notation
+\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightB>\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax
+% lineskip spacing rule is in effect i.e., the object is going to be shifted down relative to the
+% baselineskip set position by its top line height (already a part of the total height) + prevdepth + lineskip - baselineskip
+\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth\relax
+\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizelineskip\relax
+\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip\relax
+\else
+% height of first line <= \@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip - \@IEEEquantizeprevdepth - \@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit
+% standard baselineskip rules are in effect, so don't consider height of first line
+\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
+\fi
+%
+\else % prevdepth <= -1000pt, simplier \topskip type rules in effect
+\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightB>\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip
+% height of top line (already included in the total height) in excess of
+% baselineskip is the amount it will be downshifted
+\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip\relax
+\else
+% height of first line is irrelevant, remove it
+\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
+\fi
+\fi % prevdepth <= -1000pt
+%
+% adjust height for any manual offset
+\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizeoffset\relax
+% add in nominal spacer
+\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizenomvspace\relax
+% check for nonzero unitheight
+\@IEEEquantizeheightB=\@IEEEquantizeunitheight\relax
+\ifnum\@IEEEquantizeheightB=0\relax
+\@IEEEclspkgerror{IEEEquantizevspace unit height cannot be zero. Assuming 10pt.}%
+{Division by zero is not allowed.}
+\@IEEEquantizeheightB=10pt\relax
+\fi
+% get integer number of lines
+\@IEEEquantizemultiple=\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax
+\divide\@IEEEquantizemultiple\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
+% set A to contain the excess height over the \@IEEEquantizemultiple of lines
+% A = height - multiple*unitheight
+\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
+\multiply\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizemultiple\relax
+\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax
+% set B to contain the height short of \@IEEEquantizemultiple+1 of lines
+% B = unitheight - A
+\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightB-\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax
+% choose A or B based on which is closer
+\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizenomvspace\relax
+\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightA<\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
+% C = nomvspace - A, go with lower
+\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC-\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax
+\else
+% C = nomvspace + B, go with upper
+\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
+\fi
+% if violate lower bound, use next integer bound
+\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightC<\@IEEEquantizeminvspace\relax
+% A + B = unitheight
+\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax
+\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
+\fi
+% export object and spacer outside of group
+\global\let\@IEEEquantizeobjectout\@IEEEquantizeobject\relax
+\global\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax
+\endgroup
+\if@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenreg
+\@IEEEquantizeoutdimenreg=\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax
+\else
+\@IEEEquantizeobjectout\relax
+\vskip\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax
+\fi}
+
+
+% user command to disable all global assignments, possible use within object decl
+\def\IEEEquantizedisableglobal{\let\global\relax
+\let\gdef\def
+\let\xdef\edef}
+% user command to allow for the disabling of \thanks and other commands, possible use within object decl
+\def\IEEEquantizedisabletitlecmds{\long\def\thanks##1{\relax}\relax
+\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks##1{\relax}\def\newpage{\relax}}
+
+
 
 
 
@@ -3857,6 +5137,7 @@ between column types.}%
 % in the dynamic sizer.
 \let\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext=\relax
 \long\def\IEEEtitleabstractindextext#1{\def\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext{#1}}
+
 % V1.7 provide a way for users to get the \@IEEEtitleabstractindextext if
 % not in compsoc or transmag journal mode - this way abstract and keywords
 % can still be placed in their conventional position if not in those modes.
@@ -3864,11 +5145,17 @@ between column types.}%
 % display for all conference formats
 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext\relax
 \else% non-conferences
-  \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc% display if not compsoc and not transmag
-  \else
-    \ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag
-    \else% not compsoc journal nor transmag journal
-       \@IEEEtitleabstractindextext\relax
+  % V1.8a display for all technotes
+  \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext\relax
+  % V1.8a add diamond line after abstract and index terms for compsoc technotes
+  \@IEEEcompsoconly{\noindent\hfill\IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}\relax
+  \else % non-conferences and non-technotes
+    \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc% display if not compsoc and not transmag
+    \else
+      \ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag
+      \else% not compsoc journal nor transmag journal
+         \@IEEEtitleabstractindextext\relax
+      \fi
     \fi
   \fi
 \fi}
@@ -3892,9 +5179,7 @@ between column types.}%
 
 % compsoc journals use \footnotesize, compsoc conferences use normalsize
 \@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}}
-\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\normalsize}}
-
-
+\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small}}
 
 
 % V1.6 have abstract and keywords strip leading spaces, pars and newlines
@@ -3923,14 +5208,19 @@ between column types.}%
 % V1.7 compsoc keywords index terms
 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
   \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
-\def\abstract{\normalfont
-      \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\abstractname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip
-      \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
-      \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
-\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\vskip 1.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip
-      \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\IEEEkeywordsname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip
-      \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
-      \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
+\def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\bfseries
+    \if@twocolumn
+      \@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textit{\abstractname}---\relax
+    \else
+      \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
+    \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
+\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\bfseries
+    \if@twocolumn
+      \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent
+      \textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax
+    \else
+      \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
+    \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
   \else% compsoc not conference
 \def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily
     \if@twocolumn
@@ -4119,8 +5409,8 @@ between column types.}%
 {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}%
 \else% compsoc journals
 % use negative top separation as compsoc journals do not indent paragraphs after section titles
-\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-3ex plus -2ex minus -1.5ex}%
-{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\large\sffamily\bfseries\scshape}}%
+\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -2ex minus -1.5ex}%
+{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\sublargesize\sffamily\bfseries\scshape}}%
 % Note that subsection and smaller may not be correct for the Computer Society,
 % I have to look up an example.
 \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -1.5ex minus -1.5ex}%
@@ -4140,6 +5430,16 @@ between column types.}%
 \fi
 
 
+% V1.8a provide for a raised line Introduction section for use with Computer
+% Society papers. We have to remove any spacing glue after the section
+% heading and then remove the blank line for the new paragraph after it.
+% LaTeX's section handler alters \everypar and we need to propogate those
+% changes outside of the \parbox lest there be spacing problems at the top
+% of the next section.
+\def\IEEEraisesectionheading#1{\noindent\raisebox{1.5\baselineskip}[0pt][0pt]{\parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{#1\unskip\global\everypar=\everypar}}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\vspace{-\parskip}\par}
+
+
+
 %% ENVIRONMENTS
 % "box" symbols at end of proofs
 \def\IEEEQEDclosed{\mbox{\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{1.3ex}}} % for a filled box
@@ -4171,6 +5471,27 @@ between column types.}%
 %\itemindent is set to \z@ by list, so define new temporary variable
 \newdimen\@IEEEtmpitemindent
 
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+% V1.8a compsoc uses bold theorem titles, a period instead of a colon, vertical spacing, and hanging indentation
+% V1.8 allow long theorem names to break across lines.
+% Thanks to Miquel Payaro for reporting this.
+\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax
+    \topsep 0.2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip plus 0.26\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip minus 0.05\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
+    \rmfamily\trivlist\hangindent\parindent%
+    \item[]\textit{\bfseries\noindent #1\ #2.} \itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent\relax}
+\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax
+\topsep 0.2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip plus 0.26\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip minus 0.05\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
+\rmfamily\trivlist\hangindent\parindent%
+% V1.6 IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics
+% Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this.
+    \item[]\textit{\bfseries\noindent #1\ #2\ (#3).} \itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent\relax}
+% V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with
+% lines below.
+\def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist\vskip 0.25\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip plus 0.26\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip minus 0.05\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}
+\else
+%
+% noncompsoc
+% 
 % V1.8 allow long theorem names to break across lines.
 % Thanks to Miquel Payaro for reporting this.
 \def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax\topsep 0pt\rmfamily\trivlist%
@@ -4182,6 +5503,9 @@ between column types.}%
 % V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with
 % lines below.
 \def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist}
+\fi
+
+
 
 % V1.6
 % display command for the section the theorem is in - so that \thesection
@@ -4884,21 +6208,22 @@ Use \@IEEEbackslash #2 instead.}}
 
 
 % provide some legacy IEEEtran commands
-\def\authorblockA{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockA}{IEEEauthorblockA}\IEEEauthorblockA}
-\def\authorblockN{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockN}{IEEEauthorblockN}\IEEEauthorblockN}
-\def\authorrefmark{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorrefmark}{IEEEauthorrefmark}\IEEEauthorrefmark}
-\def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart}
-\def\pubid{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubid}{IEEEpubid}\IEEEpubid}
-\def\pubidadjcol{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubidadjcol}{IEEEpubidadjcol}\IEEEpubidadjcol}
-\def\specialpapernotice{\@IEEElegacywarn{specialpapernotice}{IEEEspecialpapernotice}\IEEEspecialpapernotice}
 \def\IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext{\@IEEElegacywarn{IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}{IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\IEEEtitleabstractindextext}
 \def\IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext{\@IEEElegacywarn{IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext}{IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext}\IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext}
 % provide some legacy IEEEtran environments
-\def\keywords{\@IEEElegacywarn{keywords}{IEEEkeywords}\IEEEkeywords}
-\def\endkeywords{\endIEEEkeywords}
-
 
 
+% V1.8a no more support for these legacy commands
+%\def\authorblockA{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockA}{IEEEauthorblockA}\IEEEauthorblockA}
+%\def\authorblockN{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockN}{IEEEauthorblockN}\IEEEauthorblockN}
+%\def\authorrefmark{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorrefmark}{IEEEauthorrefmark}\IEEEauthorrefmark}
+%\def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart}
+%\def\pubid{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubid}{IEEEpubid}\IEEEpubid}
+%\def\pubidadjcol{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubidadjcol}{IEEEpubidadjcol}\IEEEpubidadjcol}
+%\def\specialpapernotice{\@IEEElegacywarn{specialpapernotice}{IEEEspecialpapernotice}\IEEEspecialpapernotice}
+% and environments
+%\def\keywords{\@IEEElegacywarn{keywords}{IEEEkeywords}\IEEEkeywords}
+%\def\endkeywords{\endIEEEkeywords}
 % V1.8 no more support for legacy IED list commands
 %\let\labelindent\IEEElabelindent
 %\def\calcleftmargin{\@IEEElegacywarn{calcleftmargin}{IEEEcalcleftmargin}\IEEEcalcleftmargin}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtrantools.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtrantools.sty
index 7f09bc81b60..278fb05fe66 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtrantools.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtrantools.sty
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 %%
-%% IEEEtrantools.sty 2012/12/27 version V1.3
+%% IEEEtrantools.sty 2014/09/17 version V1.4
 %% 
 %% 
 %% This package provides several popular and unique commands from the
-%% IEEEtran.cls class (version 1.8) file.
+%% IEEEtran.cls class (version 1.8a) file.
 %% 
 %% The provided commands include \IEEEPARstart, \IEEEitemize, \IEEEenumerate,
 %% \IEEEdescription as well as the \IEEEeqnarray, \IEEEeqnarraybox family
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@
 %% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/
 %%
 %% 
-%% Copyright (c) 2002-2012 by Michael Shell
+%% Copyright (c) 2002-2014 by Michael Shell
 %%                            See: http://www.michaelshell.org/
 %%                            for current contact information.
 %%
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@
 %%**********************************************************************
 
 
-\ProvidesPackage{IEEEtrantools}[2012/12/27 V1.3 by Michael Shell]
+\ProvidesPackage{IEEEtrantools}[2014/09/17 V1.4 by Michael Shell]
 \typeout{-- See the "IEEEtrantools_doc.txt" manual for usage information.}
 \typeout{-- http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/tools/}
 \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
@@ -78,6 +78,10 @@
 }}
 
 
+% hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting
+\def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\PackageError{IEEEtrantools}}
+
+
 % define needed flags to indicate document options
 \newif\if@IEEETOOLSredeflists
 \global\@IEEETOOLSredeflistsfalse
@@ -87,9 +91,11 @@
 % dimen
 \newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
 \newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
+\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
 % count
 \newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountA
 \newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountB
+\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountC
 % token list
 \newtoks\@IEEEtrantmptoksA
 
@@ -103,10 +109,792 @@
 \ProcessOptions
 
 
-
 % store the nominal value of jot
 \newdimen\IEEEnormaljot
 \IEEEnormaljot\jot\relax
+% V1.4 allow for other packages that later change \jot
+\AtBeginDocument{\IEEEnormaljot\jot\relax}
+
+
+
+
+%% -- Command Argument Scanning Support Functions --
+%
+
+% usage: \@IEEEstripouterbraces*{}
+% \@IEEEstripouterbraces fully expands its argument (which it then stores
+% in \@IEEEstripouterbracesarg) via \edef, then removes any outer enclosing
+% braces, and finally stores the result in the macro
+% \@IEEEstrippedouterbraces.
+%
+% For example:
+% \@IEEEstripouterbraces{{{{ab}c}}}
+% results in:
+%
+% \@IEEEstripouterbracesarg ==> a macro containing {{{ab}c}}
+% \@IEEEstrippedouterbraces ==> a macro containing {ab}c
+%
+% the *-star form,\@IEEEstripouterbraces*, does not expand the argument
+% contents during processing
+\def\@IEEEstripouterbraces{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef=\def\@@IEEEstripouterbraces}{\let\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef=\edef\@@IEEEstripouterbraces}}
+
+\def\@@IEEEstripouterbraces#1{\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg{#1}\relax
+% If the macro is unchanged after being acquired as a single delimited
+% argument, we know we have one sequence of tokens without any enclosing
+% braces. Loop until this is true.
+\loop
+  \expandafter\@@@IEEEstripouterbraces\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER
+\ifx\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg
+\else
+  \let\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces
+\repeat}
+
+\def\@@@IEEEstripouterbraces#1\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER{\def\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces{#1}}
+
+
+
+% usage: \@IEEEextractgroup*{}
+% \@IEEEextractgroup fully expands its argument (which it then stores in
+% \@IEEEextractgrouparg) via \edef and then assigns the first "brace group"
+% of tokens to the macro \@IEEEextractedgroup.
+% The remaining groups, if any, are stored in the macro
+% \@IEEEextractedgroupremain. If the argument does not contain the requisite
+% groups, the respective macros will be defined to be empty.
+% There is an asymmetry in that \@IEEEextractedgroup is stripped of its first
+% outer grouping while \@IEEEextractedgroupremain retains even the outer
+% grouping (if present) that originally identified it as a group.
+%
+% For example:
+% \@IEEEextractgroup{{{ab}}{c{de}}}
+% results in:
+%
+% \@IEEEextractgrouparg       ==> a macro containing {{ab}}{c{de}}
+% \@IEEEextractedgroup        ==> a macro containing {ab}
+% \@IEEEextractedgroupremain  ==> a macro containing {c{de}}
+%
+% The *-star form, \@IEEEextractgroup*, does not expand its argument
+% contents during processing.
+\def\@IEEEextractgroup{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextractgroupdef=\def\@@IEEEextractgroup}{\let\@IEEEextractgroupdef=\edef\@@IEEEextractgroup}}
+
+\def\@@IEEEextractgroup#1{\@IEEEextractgroupdef\@IEEEextractgrouparg{#1}\relax
+% trap the case of an empty extracted group as this would cause problems with
+% \@IEEEextractgroupremain's argument acquisition
+\ifx\@IEEEextractgrouparg\@empty
+  \def\@IEEEextractedgroup{}\relax
+  \def\@IEEEextractedgroupremain{}\relax
+\else
+  % We have to use some dirty tricks here. We want to insert {} around
+  % whatever remains after the first group so that TeX's argument scanner
+  % will preserve any originally enclosing braces as well as provide an
+  % empty argument to acquire even if there isn't a second group.
+  % In this first of two dirty tricks, we put a } at the end of the structure
+  % we are going to extract from. The \ifnum0=`{\fi keeps TeX happy to allow
+  % what would otherwise be an unbalanced macro definition for
+  % \@@IEEEextractgroup to be acceptable to it.
+  \ifnum0=`{\fi\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroupremain\@IEEEextractgrouparg}\relax
+\fi}
+
+% In the second part of the dirty tricks, we insert a leading { right after
+% the first group is acquired, but before the remainder is. Again, the
+% \ifnum0=`}\fi keeps TeX happy during definition time, but will disappear
+% during run time.
+\def\@IEEEextractgroupremain#1{\def\@IEEEextractedgroup{#1}\expandafter\@@IEEEextractgroupremain\expandafter{\ifnum0=`}\fi}
+
+\def\@@IEEEextractgroupremain#1{\def\@IEEEextractedgroupremain{#1}}
+
+
+
+% usage: \@IEEEextracttoken*{}
+% \@IEEEextracttoken fully expands its argument (which it then stores in
+% \@IEEEextracttokenarg) via \edef and then the meaning of the first
+% nonbrace (but including the empty group) token found is assigned via \let
+% to \@IEEEextractedtoken as well as stored in the macro
+% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro. Tokens that would otherwise be discarded during
+% the acquisition of the first are stored in \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded,
+% however their original relative brace nesting depths are not guaranteed to
+% be preserved.
+% If the argument is empty, or if a first nonbrace token does not exist (or
+% is an empty group), \@IEEEextractedtoken will be \relax and
+% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro and \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded will be empty.
+%
+% For example:
+% \@IEEEextracttoken{{{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}}
+% results in:
+%
+% \@IEEEextracttokenarg          ==> a macro containing {{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}
+% \@IEEEextractedtoken           ==> the letter a
+% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro      ==> a macro containing a
+% \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded ==> a macro containing bcd{ef}g
+%
+% the *-star form, \@IEEEextracttoken*, does not expand its argument
+% contents during processing.
+\def\@IEEEextracttoken{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextracttokendef=\def\@@IEEEextracttoken}{\let\@IEEEextracttokendef=\edef\@@IEEEextracttoken}}
+
+\def\@@IEEEextracttoken#1{\@IEEEextracttokendef\@IEEEextracttokenarg{#1}\relax
+\def\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded{}\relax % initialize to empty
+% if the macro is unchanged after being acquired as a single undelimited argument
+% with anything after it being stripped off as a delimited argument
+% we know we have one token without any enclosing braces. loop until this is true.
+\let\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@IEEEextracttokenarg
+\loop
+  % trap case of an empty argument as this would cause a problem with
+  % \@@@IEEEextracttoken's first (nondelimited) argument acquisition
+  \ifx\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@empty
+    \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{}\relax
+  \else
+    \expandafter\@@@IEEEextracttoken\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER\relax
+  \fi
+  \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup
+  \else
+    \let\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup=\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro
+\repeat
+% we can safely do a \let= here because there should be at most one token
+% the relax is needed to handle the case of no token found
+\expandafter\let\expandafter\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\relax}
+
+\def\@@@IEEEextracttoken#1#2\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER{\def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{#1}\relax
+\def\@@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded{#2}\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+{\expandafter\@@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded}}
+
+
+
+% usage: \@IEEEextracttokengroups*{}
+% \@IEEEextracttokengroups fully expands its argument (which it then stores
+% in \@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg) and then assigns the first "brace group" of
+% tokens (with the outermost braces removed) to the macro
+% \@IEEEextractedfirstgroup.
+% The meaning of the first nonbrace (but including the empty group) token
+% within this first group is assigned via \let to \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken
+% as well as stored in the macro \@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro. If a first
+% nonbrace token does not exist (or is an empty group), these will be \relax
+% and empty, respectively.  Tokens that would otherwise be discarded during
+% the acquisition of the first token in the first group are stored in
+% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded, however their original relative brace
+% nesting depths are not guaranteed to be preserved.
+% The first group within this first group is stored in the macro
+% \@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup.
+% Likewise for the next group after the first: \@IEEEextractednextgroup,
+% \@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup, \@IEEEextractednextgroupfirsttoken,
+% \@IEEEextractednextgroupfirsttokenmacro, and 
+% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded.
+% All tokens/groups after the first group, including any enclosing braces,
+% are stored in the macro \@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain which will
+% be empty if none exist.
+%
+% For example:
+% \@IEEEextracttokengroups{{{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}}
+% will result in:
+%
+% \@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg             ==> a macro containing {{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}
+% \@IEEEextractedfirstgroup               ==> a macro containing {ab}{cd}
+% \@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain    ==> a macro containing {{ef}g}
+% \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken               ==> the letter a
+% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro          ==> a macro containing a
+% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded     ==> a macro containing bcd
+% \@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup          ==> a macro containing ab
+% \@IEEEextractednextgroup                ==> a macro containing {ef}g
+% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken           ==> the letter e
+% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokenmacro      ==> a macro containing e
+% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded ==> a macro containing fg
+% \@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup           ==> a macro containing ef
+%
+% If given an empty argument, \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken and
+% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken will be set to \relax
+% and all the macros will be empty.
+% the *-star form, \@IEEEextracttokengroups*, does not expand its argument
+% contents during processing.
+%
+% Depends on: \@IEEEextractgroup, \@IEEEextracttoken
+\def\@IEEEextracttokengroups{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef=\def\@@IEEEextracttokengroups}{\let\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef=\edef\@@IEEEextracttokengroups}}
+\def\@@IEEEextracttokengroups#1{\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef\@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg{#1}\relax
+% begin extraction, these functions are safe with empty arguments
+% first group
+\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg}\relax
+\let\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup
+\let\@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain\@IEEEextractedgroupremain
+\expandafter\@IEEEextracttoken\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup}\relax
+\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttoken\@IEEEextractedtoken
+\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro
+\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded
+% first first group
+\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup}\relax
+\let\@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup
+% next group
+\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain}\relax
+\let\@IEEEextractednextgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup
+\expandafter\@IEEEextracttoken\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractednextgroup}\relax
+\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken\@IEEEextractedtoken
+\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttokenmacro\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro
+\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded
+% next first group
+\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractednextgroup}\relax
+\let\@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup}
+
+
+%%
+%% -- End of Command Argument Scanning Support Functions --
+
+
+
+
+% -- page setup commands --
+
+% The default sample text for calculating margins
+\def\IEEEdefaultsampletext{\normalfont\normalsize gT}
+\def\IEEEdefaultheadersampletext{\normalfont\normalsize T}
+\def\IEEEdefaultfootersampletext{\normalfont\normalsize gT}
+
+
+
+% usage: \IEEEsettextwidth{inner margin}{outer margin}
+% Sets \textwidth to allow the specified inner and outer margins
+% for the current \paperwidth.
+\def\IEEEsettextwidth#1#2{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\paperwidth
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB#1\relax
+\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB#2\relax
+\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
+\textwidth\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}
+
+
+
+% usage: \IEEEsetsidemargin{mode: i, o, c, a}{margin/offset}
+% Sets \oddsidemargin and \evensidemargin to yield the specified margin
+% of the given mode.
+% The available modes are:
+% i = inner margin
+% o = outer margin
+% c = centered, with the given offset
+% a = adjust the margins using the given offset
+% For the offsets, positive values increase the inner margin.
+% \textwidth should be set properly for the given margins before calling this
+% function.
+\def\IEEEsetsidemargin#1#2{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #2\relax
+\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax
+% check for mode errors
+\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty
+  \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
+  Defaulting to `i'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space are: i, o, c and a.}\relax
+  \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=i\relax
+  \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{i}\relax
+\else
+  \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
+    \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
+  \fi
+\fi
+% handle each mode
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax
+  \advance\oddsidemargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+\else
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax
+  \oddsidemargin\paperwidth
+  \advance\oddsidemargin by -\textwidth
+  \divide\oddsidemargin by 2\relax
+  \advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax
+  \advance\oddsidemargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+\else
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken o\relax
+  \oddsidemargin\paperwidth
+  \advance\oddsidemargin by -\textwidth
+  \advance\oddsidemargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
+  \advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax
+\else
+  \if\@IEEEextractedtoken i\relax
+  \else
+    \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
+    Defaulting to `i'}%
+    {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space are: i, o, c  and a.}%
+  \fi
+  \oddsidemargin\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
+  \advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax
+\fi\fi\fi
+% odd and even side margins both mean "inner" for single sided pages
+\evensidemargin\oddsidemargin
+% but are mirrors of each other when twosided is in effect
+\if@twoside
+  \evensidemargin\paperwidth
+  \advance\evensidemargin by -\textwidth
+  \advance\evensidemargin by -\oddsidemargin
+  % have to compensate for both the builtin 1in LaTex offset
+  % and the fact we already subtracted this offset from \oddsidemargin
+  \advance\evensidemargin -2in\relax
+\fi}
+
+
+
+% usage: \IEEEsettextheight[sample text]{top text margin}{bottom text margin}
+% Sets \textheight based on the specified top margin and bottom margin.
+% Takes into consideration \paperheight, \topskip, and (by default) the
+% the actual height and depth of the \IEEEdefaultsampletext text. 
+\def\IEEEsettextheight{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsettextheight}{\@IEEEsettextheight[\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}}
+\def\@IEEEsettextheight[#1]#2#3{\textheight\paperheight\relax
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #2\relax
+  \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% subtract top margin
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #3\relax
+  \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% subtract bottom margin
+  \advance \textheight by \topskip% add \topskip
+  % subtract off everything above the top, and below the bottom, baselines
+  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
+  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}
+
+
+
+\newdimen\IEEEquantizedlength
+\IEEEquantizedlength 0sp\relax
+\newdimen\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff
+\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff 0sp\relax
+\def\IEEEquantizedlengthint{0}
+
+% usage: \IEEEquantizelength{mode: d, c, i}{base unit}{length}
+% Sets the length \IEEEquantizedlength to be an integer multiple of the given
+% (nonzero) base unit such that \IEEEquantizedlength approximates the given
+% length.
+% \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff is a length equal to the difference between the
+% \IEEEquantizedlength and the given length.
+% \IEEEquantizedlengthint is a macro containing the integer number of base units
+% in \IEEEquantizedlength.
+% i.e., \IEEEquantizedlength =  \IEEEquantizedlengthint * base unit
+% The mode determines how \IEEEquantizedlength is quantized:
+% d = always decrease (always round down \IEEEquantizeint)
+% c = use the closest match
+% i = always increase (always round up \IEEEquantizeint)
+% In anycase, if the given length is already quantized,
+% \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff will be set to zero.
+\def\IEEEquantizelength#1#2#3{\begingroup
+% work in isolation so as not to externally disturb the \@IEEEtrantmp
+% variables
+% load the argument values indirectly via \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff
+% in case the user refers to our \@IEEEtrantmpdimenX, \IEEEquantizedlength,
+% etc. in the arguments. we also will work with these as counters,
+% i.e., in sp units
+% A has the base unit
+\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff #2\relax\relax\relax\relax
+\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff
+% B has the input length
+\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff #3\relax\relax\relax\relax
+\@IEEEtrantmpcountB\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountB sp\relax
+% \@IEEEtrantmpcountC will have the quantized int
+% \IEEEquantizedlength will have the quantized length
+% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC will have the quantized diff
+% initialize them to zero as this is what will be
+% exported if an error occurs
+\@IEEEtrantmpcountC 0\relax
+\IEEEquantizedlength 0sp\relax
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC 0sp\relax
+% extract mode
+\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax
+% check for mode errors
+\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty
+  \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
+  Defaulting to `d'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEquantizelength\space are: d, c and i.}\relax
+  \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=d\relax
+  \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{d}\relax
+\else
+  \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
+    \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEquantizelength\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
+  \fi
+\fi
+% check for base unit is zero error
+\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=0\relax
+\@IEEEclspkgerror{Base unit is zero in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
+  \string\IEEEquantizedlength\space and \string\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\space are set to zero}{Division by zero is not allowed.}\relax
+\else% base unit is nonzero
+  % \@IEEEtrantmpcountC carries the number of integer units
+  % in the quantized length (integer length \ base)
+  \@IEEEtrantmpcountC\@IEEEtrantmpcountB\relax
+  \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax
+  % \IEEEquantizedlength has the (rounded down) quantized length
+  % = base * int
+  \IEEEquantizedlength\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+  \multiply\IEEEquantizedlength by \@IEEEtrantmpcountC\relax
+  % \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC has the difference
+  % = quantized length - length
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
+  % trap special case of length being already quantized
+  % to avoid a roundup under i option
+  \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC=0sp\relax
+  \else % length not is already quantized
+    % set dimenA to carry the upper quantized (absolute value) difference:
+    % quantizedlength + base - length
+    \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \IEEEquantizedlength\relax
+    \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
+    % set dimenB to carry the lower quantized (absolute value) difference:
+    % length - quantizedlength
+    \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\IEEEquantizedlength\relax
+    % handle each mode
+    \if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax
+      % compare upper and lower amounts, select upper if lower > upper
+      \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+        % use upper
+        \advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax
+        \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax
+        \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
+      \else% <=. uselower
+        % no need to do anything for lower, use output values already setup
+      \fi
+    \else% not mode c
+    \if\@IEEEextractedtoken i\relax
+      % always round up under i mode
+      \advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax
+      \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax
+      \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
+    \else
+      \if\@IEEEextractedtoken d\relax
+      \else
+        \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
+        Defaulting to `d'}%
+        {Valid modes for \string\IEEEquantizelength\space are: d, c, and i.}\relax
+      \fi % if d
+      % no need to do anything for d, use output values already setup
+    \fi\fi % if i, c
+  \fi % if length is already quantized
+\fi% if base unit is zero
+% globally assign the results to macros we use here to escape the enclosing
+% group without needing to call \global on any of the \@IEEEtrantmp variables.
+% \@IEEEtrantmpcountC has the quantized int
+% \IEEEquantizedlength has the quantized length
+% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC has the quantized diff
+\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthintmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
+\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax
+\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
+\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\relax
+\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthdiffmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
+\endgroup
+% locally assign the outputs here from the macros
+\expandafter\IEEEquantizedlength\@IEEEquantizedlengthmacro sp\relax
+\expandafter\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\@IEEEquantizedlengthdiffmacro sp\relax
+\edef\IEEEquantizedlengthint{\@IEEEquantizedlengthintmacro}\relax}
+
+
+
+\newdimen\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff
+\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff 0sp\relax
+
+% usage: \IEEEquantizetextheight[base unit]{mode: d, c, i}
+% Sets \textheight to be an integer multiple of the current \baselineskip
+% (or the optionally specified base unit) plus the first (\topskip) line.
+% \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff is a length equal to the difference between
+% the new quantized and original \textheight.
+% \IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc is a macro containing the integer number of
+% lines per column under the quantized \textheight. i.e.,
+% \textheight = \IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc * \baselineskip + \topskip
+% The mode determines how \textheight is quantized:
+% d = always decrease (always round down the number of lines per column)
+% c = use the closest match
+% i = always increase (always round up the number of lines per column)
+% In anycase, if \textheight is already quantized, it will remain unchanged,
+% and \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff will be set to zero.
+% Depends on: \IEEEquantizelength
+\def\IEEEquantizetextheight{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEquantizetextheight}{\@IEEEquantizetextheight[\baselineskip]}}
+\def\@IEEEquantizetextheight[#1]#2{\begingroup
+% use our \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff as a scratch pad
+% we need to subtract off \topskip before quantization
+\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\textheight
+\advance\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff by -\topskip\relax
+\IEEEquantizelength{#2}{#1}{\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff}
+% add back \topskip line
+\advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \topskip
+\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlengthint\relax
+\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax
+% globally assign the results to macros we use here to escape the enclosing
+% group without needing to call \global on any of the \@IEEEtrantmp variables.
+\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightlpcmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
+\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax
+\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
+\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\relax
+\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightdiffmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
+\endgroup
+% locally assign the outputs here from the macros
+\textheight\@IEEEquantizedtextheightmacro sp\relax
+\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\@IEEEquantizedtextheightdiffmacro sp\relax
+\edef\IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc{\@IEEEquantizedtextheightlpcmacro}}
+
+
+
+% usage: \IEEEsettopmargin[sample text]{mode: t, b, c, a, q}{margin/offset}
+% Sets \topmargin based on the specified vertical margin.
+% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \headheight, \headsep,
+% \topskip, and (by default) the the actual height (or, for the bottom, depth)
+% of the \IEEEdefaultsampletext text.
+% The available modes are:
+% t = top margin
+% b = bottom margin
+% c = vertically centered, with the given offset
+% a = adjust the vertical margins using the given offset
+% q = adjust the margins using \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff and the given offset
+% For the offsets, positive values increase the top margin.
+% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip and \textheight should be set properly for the
+% given margins before calling this function.
+\def\IEEEsettopmargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsettopmargin}{\@IEEEsettopmargin[\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}}
+\def\@IEEEsettopmargin[#1]#2#3{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #3\relax
+\@IEEEextracttoken{#2}\relax
+% check for mode errors
+\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty
+  \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
+  Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space are: t, b, c, a and q.}\relax
+  \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax
+  \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax
+\else
+  \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
+    \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
+  \fi
+\fi
+% handle each mode
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax
+  \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+\else
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken q\relax
+  % we need to adjust by half the \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff value
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\relax
+  \divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax
+  % a positive \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff means we need to reduce \topmargin
+  % because \textheight has been lenghtened
+  \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
+  \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+\else
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax
+  \topmargin\paperheight
+  \advance\topmargin by -\textheight
+  % \textheight includes \topskip, but we should not count topskip whitespace here, backout
+  \advance \topmargin by \topskip
+  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
+  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
+  \divide\topmargin by 2\relax
+  \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+\else
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax
+  \topmargin\paperheight
+  \advance\topmargin by -\textheight
+  % \textheight includes \topskip, but we should not count topskip whitespace here, backout
+  \advance \topmargin by \topskip
+  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
+  \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+\else
+  \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax
+  \else
+    \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
+    Defaulting to `t'}%
+    {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space are: t, b, c, a and q.}\relax
+  \fi
+  \topmargin\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
+\fi\fi % if t, b, c
+% convert desired top margin into actual \topmargin
+% this is not done for the q or a modes because they are only adjustments
+\advance \topmargin by -\topskip
+\advance \topmargin by -1in
+\advance \topmargin by -\headheight
+\advance \topmargin by -\headsep
+\fi\fi % if q, a
+}
+
+
+
+% usage: \IEEEsetheadermargin[header sample][text sample]{mode: t, b, c, a}{margin/offset}
+% Differentially adjusts \topmargin and \headsep (such that their sum is unchanged)
+% based on the specified header margin.
+% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \headheight, \topskip, and (by default)
+% the actual height (or depth) of the \IEEEdefaultheadersampletext and
+% \IEEEdefaultsampletext text.
+% The available modes are:
+% t = top margin (top of the header text to the top of the page)
+% b = bottom margin (bottom of the header text to the top of the main text)
+% c = vertically centered between the main text and the top of the page,
+%     with the given offset
+% a = adjust the vertical position using the given offset
+% For the offsets, positive values move the header downward.
+% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip and \topmargin should be set properly before
+% calling this function.
+\def\IEEEsetheadermargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsetheadermargin}{\@IEEEsetheadermargin[\IEEEdefaultheadersampletext]}}
+\def\@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1]{\@ifnextchar [{\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1]}{\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1][\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}}
+\def\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1][#2]#3#4{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #4\relax
+\@IEEEextracttoken{#3}\relax
+% check for mode errors
+\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty
+  \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
+  Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space are: t, b, c, and a.}\relax
+  \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax
+  \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax
+\else
+  \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
+    \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
+  \fi
+\fi
+% handle each mode
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax
+  % No need to do anything here and can pass through the adjustment
+  % value as is. The end adjustment of \topmargin and \headsep will
+  % do all that is needed
+\else
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax
+  % get the bottom margin
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax
+  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topskip
+  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
+  % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header bottom margin
+  % subtract from it the top header margin
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB -1in\relax % take into consideration the system 1in offset of the top margin
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\topmargin
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\headheight
+  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
+  % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the difference between the bottom and top margins
+  % we need to adjust by half this amount to center the header
+  \divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax
+  % and add to offset
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
+\else
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax
+  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topskip
+  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
+  % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header bottom margin
+  % get the difference between the actual and the desired
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
+\else
+  \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax
+  \else
+    \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
+    Defaulting to `t'}%
+    {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space are: t, b, c and a.}\relax
+  \fi
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % take into consideration the system 1in offset of the top margin
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topmargin
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \headheight
+  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
+  % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header top margin
+  % get the difference between the desired and the actual
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
+\fi\fi % if t, b, c
+\fi % if a
+% advance \topmargin by the needed amount and reduce \headsep by the same
+% so as not to disturb the location of the main text
+\advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+\advance\headsep by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+}
+
+
+
+% usage: \IEEEsetfootermargin[footer sample][text sample]{mode: t, b, c, a}{margin/offset}
+% Adjusts \footskip based on the specified footer margin.
+% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \paperheight, \headheight,
+% \headsep, \textheight and (by default) the actual height (or depth) of the
+% \IEEEdefaultfootersampletext and \IEEEdefaultsampletext text.
+% The available modes are:
+% t = top margin (top of the footer text to the bottom of the main text)
+% b = bottom margin (bottom of the footer text to the bottom of page)
+% c = vertically centered between the main text and the bottom of the page,
+%     with the given offset
+% a = adjust the vertical position using the given offset
+% For the offsets, positive values move the footer downward.
+% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip, \topmargin, and \textheight should be set
+% properly before calling this function.
+\def\IEEEsetfootermargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsetfootermargin}{\@IEEEsetfootermargin[\IEEEdefaultfootersampletext]}}
+\def\@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1]{\@ifnextchar [{\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1]}{\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1][\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}}
+\def\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1][#2]#3#4{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #4\relax
+\@IEEEextracttoken{#3}\relax
+% check for mode errors
+\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty
+  \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
+  Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space are: t, b, c, and a.}\relax
+  \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax
+  \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax
+\else
+  \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
+    \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
+  \fi
+\fi
+% handle each mode
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax
+  % No need to do anything here and can pass through the adjustment
+  % value as is. The end adjustment of \footskip will do all that
+  % is needed
+\else
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax
+  % calculate the bottom margin
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % system 1in offset
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\topmargin\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headheight\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\textheight\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax
+  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\paperheight
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
+  % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer bottom margin
+  % now subtract off the footer top margin
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB -\footskip\relax
+  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
+  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
+  % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the difference between the bottom
+  % and top footer margins
+  % our adjustment must be half this value to center the footer
+  \divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax
+  % add to the offset
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
+\else
+\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax
+  % calculate the bottom margin
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % system 1in offset
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\topmargin\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headheight\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\textheight\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax
+  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\paperheight
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
+  % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer bottom margin
+  % get the difference between the actual and the desired
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
+\else
+  \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax
+  \else
+    \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
+    Defaulting to `t'}%
+    {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space are: t, b, c and a.}\relax
+  \fi
+  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax
+  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
+  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
+  % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer top margin
+  % get the difference between the desired and the actual
+  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
+\fi\fi % if t, b, c
+\fi % if a
+% advance \footskip by the needed amount
+\advance\footskip by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+}
+
+
+% -- End page setup commands --
+
+
 
 
 % Itemize, Enumerate and Description (IED) List Controls
@@ -538,9 +1326,6 @@
 %% I don't make the claim that my work here is even near their calibre. ;)
 
 
-% hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting
-\def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}}
-
 \newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojot% flag to indicate if the environment was called as the star form
 \@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojotfalse
 
@@ -1189,7 +1974,7 @@ Using a default centering column instead}%
    #1\relax% allow user to override defaults
    \let\\\@IEEEeqnarraycr% replace newline with one that can put in eqn. numbers
    \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@% col. count = 0 for first line
-   \@IEEEbuildpreamble #2\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA 
+   \@IEEEbuildpreamble{#2}\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA 
    % put in the column for the equation number
    \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first
    \toks0={##}%
@@ -1384,7 +2169,7 @@ $$\@ignoretrue}
    \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides
    #1\relax% allow user to override defaults
    \let\\\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr% replace newline with one that allows optional spacing
-   \@IEEEbuildpreamble #4\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA
+   \@IEEEbuildpreamble{#4}\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA
    % add an isolation column to the preamble to stop \\'s {} from getting into the last col
    \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first
    \toks0={##}%
@@ -1395,16 +2180,15 @@ $$\@ignoretrue}
    % begin the alignment
    \everycr{}%
    % use only the very first token to determine the positioning
-   % this stops some problems when the user uses more than one letter,
-   % but is probably not worth the effort
-   % \noindent is used as a delimiter
-   \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
-   \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#2\relax\relax\noindent
-   % \@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded
+   \@IEEEextracttoken{#2}\relax
+   \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
+     \typeout{** WARNING: IEEEeqnarraybox position specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
+   \fi
+   % \@IEEEextractedtoken has the first token, the rest are ignored
    % if we need to put things into and hbox and go into math mode, do so now
    \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW \leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\fi%
    % use the appropriate vbox type
-   \if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken c\relax%
+   \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax%
    \vcenter\else\vbox\fi\fi\bgroup%
    \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines
    \ifx#3\relax\halign\else\halign to #3\relax\fi%
@@ -1452,8 +2236,10 @@ $$\@ignoretrue}
 
 
 
-% starts the halign preamble build
-\def\@IEEEbuildpreamble{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register
+% usage: \@IEEEbuildpreamble{column specifiers}
+% starts the halign preamble build 
+% the assembled preamble is put in \@IEEEtrantmptoksA
+\def\@IEEEbuildpreamble#1{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register
 \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=u%current column type is not yet known
 \let\@IEEEBPprevtype=s%the previous column type was the start
 \let\@IEEEBPnexttype=u%next column type is not yet known
@@ -1469,17 +2255,19 @@ $$\@ignoretrue}
 % record the default end glues
 \edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart}%
 \edef\@IEEEBPendglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend}%
+\edef\@IEEEedefMACRO{#1}\relax% fully expand the preamble to support macro containers
 % now parse the user's column specifications
-\@@IEEEbuildpreamble}
+% \ignorespaces is used as a delimiter, need at least one trailing \relax because
+% \@@IEEEbuildpreamble looks into the future 
+\expandafter\@@IEEEbuildpreamble\@IEEEedefMACRO\ignorespaces\relax\relax}
 
 
+% usage: \@@IEEEbuildpreamble{current column}{next column}
 % parses and builds the halign preamble
 \def\@@IEEEbuildpreamble#1#2{\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEbuildpreamble%
 % use only the very first token to check the end
-% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here
-\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
-\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent
-\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else%
+\@IEEEextracttokengroups{#1}\relax
+\ifx\@IEEEextractedfirsttoken\ignorespaces\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else%
 % identify current and next token type
 \@IEEEgetcoltype{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurtype}{1}% current, error on invalid
 \@IEEEgetcoltype{#2}{\@IEEEBPnexttype}{0}% next, no error on invalid next
@@ -1499,8 +2287,10 @@ $$\@ignoretrue}
 \fi\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble{#2}}
 
 
+% usage: \@@IEEEfinishpreamble{discarded}
 % executed just after preamble build is completed
 % warn about zero cols, and if prevtype type = u, put in end tabskip glue
+% argument is not used
 \def\@@IEEEfinishpreamble#1{\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols<1\relax
 \@IEEEclspkgerror{No column specifiers declared for IEEEeqnarray}%
 {At least one column type must be declared for each IEEEeqnarray.}%
@@ -1509,42 +2299,44 @@ $$\@ignoretrue}
 \if\@IEEEBPprevtype u\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue}\fi}
 
 
-% Identify and return the column specifier's type code
-\def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{%
-% use only the very first token to determine the type
-% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here
-\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
-\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent
-% \@IEEEgrabfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded
+% usage: \@IEEEgetcoltype{col specifier}{\output}{error more}
+% Identify and return the column specifier's type code in the given
+% \output macro:
 % n = number
 % g = glue (any other char in catagory 12)
 % c = letter
-% e = \end
+% e = \ignorespaces (end of sequence)
 % u = undefined
-% third argument: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char
+% error mode: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char
+\def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{%
+% use only the very first token to determine the type
+\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax
+% \@IEEEextractedtoken has the first token, the rest are discarded
 \let#2=u\relax% assume invalid until know otherwise
-\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let#2=e\else
-\ifcat\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences
-\if0\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if1\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if2\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if3\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if4\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if5\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if6\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if7\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if8\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if9\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\ifcat,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=g\relax
-\else\ifcat a\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\ifx\@IEEEextractedtoken\ignorespaces\let#2=e\else
+\ifcat\@IEEEextractedtoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences
+\if0\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
+\if1\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
+\if2\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
+\if3\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
+\if4\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
+\if5\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
+\if6\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
+\if7\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
+\if8\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
+\if9\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
+\ifcat,\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=g\relax
+\else\ifcat a\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
 \if#2u\relax
 \if0\noexpand#3\relax\else\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid character in column specifications}%
 {Only letters, numerals and certain other symbols are allowed \MessageBreak
 as IEEEeqnarray column specifiers.}\fi\fi}
 
 
-% identify the current letter referenced column
-% if invalid, use a default column
+% usage: \@IEEEgetcurcol{col specifier}
+% verify the letter referenced column exists
+% and return its name in \@IEEEBPcurcolname
+% if column specifier is invalid, use the default column @IEEEdefault
 \def\@IEEEgetcurcol#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
 \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{#1}\else% invalid column name
 \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#1" in column specifications.\MessageBreak
@@ -1553,7 +2345,9 @@ Using a default centering column instead}%
 \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}\fi}
 
 
-% identify and return the predefined (punctuation) glue value
+% usage: \@IEEEgetcurglue{glue specifier}{\output}
+% identify the predefined (punctuation) glue value
+% and return it in the given output macro
 \def\@IEEEgetcurglue#1#2{%
 % ! = \! (neg small)  -0.16667em (-3/18 em)
 % , = \, (small)       0.16667em ( 3/18 em)
@@ -1571,10 +2365,10 @@ Using a default centering column instead}%
 % value for 1em.
 % 
 % use only the very first token to determine the type
-% this prevents errant tokens from getting in the main text
-% \noindent is used as a delimiter here
-\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
-\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent
+\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax
+\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
+  \typeout{** WARNING: IEEEeqnarray predefined inter-column glue type specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
+\fi
 % get the math font 1em value
 % LaTeX2e's NFSS2 does not preload the fonts, but \IEEEeqnarray needs
 % to gain access to the math (\textfont2) font's spacing parameters.
@@ -1587,18 +2381,18 @@ Using a default centering column instead}%
 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\fontdimen6\textfont2\relax%
 % identify the glue value based on the first token
 % we discard anything after the first
-\if!\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
-\if,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
-\if:\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
-\if;\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
-\if'\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
-\if"\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
-\if.\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
-\if/\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else
-\if?\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
-\if *\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else
-\if+\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else
-\if-\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else
+\if!\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if,\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if:\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if;\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if'\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if"\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if.\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if/\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else
+\if?\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if *\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else
+\if+\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else
+\if-\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else
 \edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}%
 \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid predefined inter-column glue type "#1" in\MessageBreak
 column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak
@@ -1607,7 +2401,7 @@ column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak
 IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
 
 
-
+% usage: \@IEEEprocessNcol{digit}
 % process a numerical digit from the column specification
 % and look up the corresponding user defined glue value
 % can transform current type from n to g or a as the user defined glue is acquired
@@ -1958,10 +2752,9 @@ between column types.}%
 \def\@IEEElegacywarn#1#2{\typeout{** ATTENTION: \@IEEEbackslash #1 is deprecated (line \the\inputlineno).
 Use \@IEEEbackslash #2 instead.}}
 
-% provide for legacy commands
-\def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart}
 
-% V1.3 no longer support legacy IED list commands
+% V1.4 no longer support these legacy commands
+% \def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart}
 % \let\labelindent\IEEElabelindent
 % \def\calcleftmargin{\@IEEElegacywarn{calcleftmargin}{IEEEcalcleftmargin}\IEEEcalcleftmargin}
 % \def\setlabelwidth{\@IEEElegacywarn{setlabelwidth}{IEEEsetlabelwidth}\IEEEsetlabelwidth}